xcelsius designer userguide en

308
Crystal Xcelsius User Guide Crystal Xcelsius Designer 4.5 Windows

Upload: ammu-nair

Post on 10-Apr-2015

856 views

Category:

Documents


3 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Crystal Xcelsius Designer 4.5

Windows

Page 2: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Patents Business Objects owns the following U.S. patents, which may cover products that are offered and sold by Business Objects: 5,555,403, 6,247,008 B1, 6,578,027 B2, 6,490,593 and 6,289,352.

Trademarks Business Objects, the Business Objects logo, Crystal Reports, and Crystal Enterprise are trademarks or registered trademarks of Business Objects SA or its affiliated companies in the United States and other countries. All other names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyright Copyright © 2005 Business Objects. All rights reserved.

Third-party contributors

Business Objects products in this release may contain redistributions of software licensed from third-party contributors. Some of these individual components may also be available under alternative licenses. A partial listing of third-party contributors that have requested or permitted acknowledgments, as well as required notices, can be found at:http://www.businessobjects.com/thirdparty

Page 3: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Contents

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Crystal Xcelsius 9

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10What's New in Xcelsius version 4.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Importing an XLF file from Xcelsius 3.0/3.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Understanding the Xcelsius system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Understanding the Xcelsius tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Creating backup files in Xcelsius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Previewing the visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Viewing sample Xcelsius visualizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Dynamic and static data sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Using templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Global Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Chapter 2 Creating and updating Crystal Xcelsius visualizations 33Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Creating a visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Updating data for a visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Chapter 3 Using Crystal Xcelsius Components 41Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Using chart components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Using single value components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Using the Selector components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Using the map component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Using the art and background components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Using the collaboration components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 3

Page 4: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Contents

Using the other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Using the text components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Using the Web connectivity components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Chapter 4 Using Advanced Features 73Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Dynamic Visibility functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Ignore End Blanks for variable length ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Using the Use Web Service Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Using Flash Variables to update a visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Using the XML Data Button component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Using collaboration components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Creating templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Using Global Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Chapter 5 Exporting Crystal Xcelsius Visualizations 109Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Exporting your visualization to Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Exporting your visualization to HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Exporting your visualization to PowerPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Exporting your visualization to Adobe PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Emailing your visualization with Outlook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Exporting your visualization to a Plumtree portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Exporting your visualization to Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Exporting your visualization to an Enterprise folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Taking a snapshot of your visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Chapter 6 Crystal Xcelsius Integration with SQL Server Reporting Services 117Crystal Xcelsius and SQL Server Reporting Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Using and configuring the Reporting Services Button component . . . . . . 118

4 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 5: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Contents

Chapter 7 Crystal Xcelsius Integration with Sharepoint 123Xcelsius for Sharepoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Xcelsius for Sharepoint Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Chapter 8 Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration Features 131Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Moving from an unmanaged environment to a managed environment . . . 133Using Live Office data for Crystal Xcelsius visualizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Storing Xcelsius files in Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Managing Crystal Xcelsius files in Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Updating LiveOffice Connector settings after system migration . . . . . . . . 145

Chapter 9 Frequently Asked Questions 147Installation questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Microsoft Excel questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Microsoft PowerPoint questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Troubleshooting questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Questions about supported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Chapter 10 General Features Reference 155Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Common areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Common boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Common lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Common buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Common Alerts Tab features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 11 Chart Components Reference 167Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

5 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 6: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Contents

Drill Down tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Behavior tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Alerts Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Appearance tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Chapter 12 Single Value Component Reference 197Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Behavior tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Alerts tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Appearance tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Chapter 13 Selector Components Reference 209Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Behavior tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Alerts tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Appearance tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Chapter 14 Map Component Reference 241Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Behavior tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Alerts tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Appearance tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Chapter 15 Background Component Reference 247Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Behavior tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

6 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 7: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Contents

Chapter 16 Collaboration Components Reference 253Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Behavior tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Appearance tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Chapter 17 Text Component Reference 259Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Behavior tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Appearance tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Chapter 18 Web Connectivity Component Reference 267Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Behavior tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Appearance tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Chapter 19 Other Components Reference 279Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Behavior tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Appearance tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Chapter 20 Supported Excel Functions 297Supported Excel Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Index 301

7 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 8: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Contents

8 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 9: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Getting to Know Crystal Xcelsius

chapter

Page 10: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusOverview1

Overview

This chapter provides an introduction to Crystal Xcelsius, the components of the program, and the functionality of the program.

What's New in Xcelsius version 4.5Xcelsius now provides the following new components:• Candlestick and OHLC Chart components

The open-high-low-close and candlestick charts are primarily used to display stock data. Each marker corresponds to the four values, which are represented as lines attached to the marker on the OHLC chart and as colors on the candlestick chart. Open displays the opening price of the stock. High displays the highest price the stock achieved on that day. Low displays the lowest price the of the stock on that day. Close displays the closing price of the stock.

• List View componentThe List View component is a What You See Is What You Get representation of any group of cells from your Excel file. Each row allows multiple selections.The user can sort the columns and adjust the width of the columns in the exported SWF file.

• Panel Set componentThe Panel Set component is a series of framing options that enables you to easily navigate between files in a presentation. You can embed Jpegs or SWF files into the frames of the Panel Set component and adjust a variety of formatting features to customize the look of the component in your visualization.

• FSCommand Button componentCrystal Xcelsius 4.5 now supports FSCommand.The FSCommand Button enables you to pass values from your Crystal Xcelsius Visualization back to the Crystal Xcelsius. For detailed information about this command, see the Macromedia Flash support site at http://www.macromedia.com/support/flash/action_scripts/actionscript_dictionary/actionscript_dictionary372.html.

• LiveOffice Connector componentThe LiveOffice connector is a web connectivity component that enables you to create Crystal Xcelsius XLF (design files) and SWF (Macromedia

10 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 11: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusWhat's New in Xcelsius version 4.5 1

Flash files) using Excel spreadsheets constructed from managed Crystal Reports or Web Intelligence data.

• SkinsXcelsius has three new skins:• Graphite• Halo• Windows ClassicFor information on skins, see “Skins” on page 60.

Xcelsius now provides the following new features:• Logarithmic Scale

Logarithmic appears as an option on the X-Axis Scale and Y-Axis Scale lists in the Scale Behavior area on the Behavior tab of the Properties panel of all the chart component but the Pie Chart component. This option plots the axis values on a logarithmic scale. Values plotted on a logarithmic scale appear at unevenly spaced intervals in the chart component. Smaller values have larger space intervals; larger values have smaller space intervals. Equal percentage changes are represented by equal distances.

• Animation EnabledThe Chart components, other than the Area Chart components, now have Animation Enabled as an option on the Behavior tab of the Properties panel. When selected this option adds animation to the chart components when the visualization is run. In chart components with bars, the bars grow and shrink when the data changes and the visualization is run. In point-based chart components the points grow to full size when the visualization is run.

• Export to WordThe Export to Word option allows you to export your visualizations to Microsoft Word. Visualizations in Word are dynamic and interactive.

• Export ModelThe Export Model option lets you export a copy of the original Excel file imported into the visualization to your machine. The Excel file can be exported from a visualization that was created on your machine or on another machine. To export the Excel file, on the Data menu, click Export Model.

• Export to BusinessObjects EnterpriseThe Export to BusinessObjects Enterprise option lets you export your SWF files to BusinessObjects Enterprise. This enables you to centralize

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 11

Page 12: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusImporting an XLF file from Xcelsius 3.0/3.51

SWF files so that users can access them remotely through InfoView. For more information about this feature, see Chapter 8: Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration Features.

• Save to EnterpriseYou can now save XLF files directly to a managed BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server. For more information about this feature, see the Crystal Xcelsius 4.5: Installation and Integration Guide.

Importing an XLF file from Xcelsius 3.0/3.5Xcelsius supports the ability to import an Xcelsius visualization created with Xcelsius 3.0/3.5. This import ability lets current 3.0 and 3.5 customers upgrade their existing visualizations to take advantage of the new features of Xcelsius. Backup your current XLF, JPG and external SWF files before upgrading your visualization. To upgrade your existing visualizations, start Xcelsius and select File->Open. Select the XLF that you would like to upgrade and click Open. Xcelsius will detect that the XLF is an older visualization and warn the user that it is going to import the visualization into Xcelsius, and that this may result in certain features not functioning.Note: After you import and save your visualization with the latest Xcelsius version, the visualization cannot be opened using Xcelsius 3.0/3.5. Xcelsius minimizes the impact of migrating visualizations from Xcelsius 3.0/3.5 to this new version. However, it is possible that some of your visualizations, or more specifically, some components, will look slightly different from the original 3.0/3.5 file. The following are some of the most frequently encountered changes:• The size of some components is different. In most cases the size

difference is a matter of a few pixels.• Some custom colors appear to be slightly different. This is due to art

improvements and the introduction of skins.• The Table component differs in size and formatting. In the event of formatting differences in your components, bring up the Properties panel for the component and re-link the properties that are tied to the spreadsheet.Xcelsius supports Dynamic Data Sources across all components. This enhancement impacts visualizations that contain selectors and charts. Compare the new visualization to the Xcelsius 3.0/3.5 visualization to verify that it is functioning correctly.

12 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 13: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius system 1

Understanding the Xcelsius system

How Xcelsius differs from traditional reporting applicationsXcelsius complements all types of Portal initiatives, Business Intelligence programs, Executive Dashboards, Balanced Scorecard projects, Marketing Reports, and day-to-day reporting and presentation requirements. Xcelsius does this by letting users participate in the report creation process and analysis.

How Xcelsius worksImport an Excel file into Xcelsius, create the visualization, and publish the visualization.

To create an Xcelsius visualization 1. Import an Excel file that contains the information you want to publish.2. Build the visualization.3. Compile and publish the visualization.

Step 1: Import the Excel fileThe first step in creating a visualization is to import the Excel file that contains the data to support your visualization. During this step, Xcelsius makes a copy of the Excel file and imports the spreadsheet, including formulas, values, and cell formatting. Once the Excel file is imported, a copy of it is embedded into Xcelsius. You can continue using the original Excel file, but if you delete or add rows, columns or data, you need to re-import the Excel file.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 13

Page 14: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius system1

Step 2: Build the visualization

After the Excel file is imported, you can use Xcelsius to build the visualization. Xcelsius contains components—from backgrounds to charts— that can be selected and linked to one or more cells in the embedded spreadsheet. If you're creating a chart, for example, you can select the chart component, click it, and select the range of chart data from the spreadsheet. This process is similar to the way a chart is created using Excel. Xcelsius lets you create dynamic visualizations by pointing and clicking your mouse. You can combine two or more components and link them to the spreadsheet. For example, you can define point-and-click radio buttons that combine with a chart to show different information on the chart when each radio button is clicked.

Step 3: Compile and publish the visualizationThe final step is to preview and export the visualization. Previewing lets you test your visualization and see how it will look and behave when it is exported.Xcelsius offers a variety of ways to publish your visualization. For more details on how to publish your visualization, see “Exporting Crystal Xcelsius Visualizations” on page 109. Xcelsius visualizations can be published in the following formats:• Macromedia Flash SWF• HTML• Microsoft PowerPoint Slide• Adobe PDF• Microsoft Outlook• Microsoft Word• BusinessObjects Enterprise

How visualizations lookVisualizations created with Xcelsius can have any type of standard or personalized look. Visualizations are also fully compatible with Microsoft Power Point, HTML, and Portals.

14 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 15: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius system 1

Xcelsius visualizations conform to SWF file format. SWF is the vector-based graphics format designed to run in the Flash Player. Because a SWF file is vector-based, its graphics are scalable and play back smoothly on any screen size and across multiple platforms.Also, a vector-based file usually has a smaller file size than a bitmap animation.Visualizations created with Xcelsius are dynamic. What-if scenarios let users adjust conditions on the visualization and view the results. Interactive components let users alter the visualization conditions.The following examples show visualizations created with Xcelsius.

Example 1: What-if presentation using alertsThis visualization shows the return-on-equity (ROE) for a financial institution against its peer group performance. The alert colors are triggered, comparing the selected bank against the peer group average.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 15

Page 16: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius system1

Example 2: What-if presentation using a calculator

The following visualization was created to calculate the monthly payment for a home loan. Users can adjust the input values by moving the sliders. The calculator dynamically changes and displays the new values.

16 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 17: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius system 1

Example 3: Historical data comparison presentationThe following visualization is a dynamic financial statement report. It shows the traditional Statements of Income. When a user clicks on an account, the visualization shows the historical data organized by region or as a comparison against competitors.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 17

Page 18: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius tools1

Understanding the Xcelsius tools

Before you begin using Xcelsius, take a moment to familiarize yourself with the interface by reading the following sections.

Using the Object BrowserWith the Object Browser, you can select, hide, cut, copy, paste, delete, bring forward, move back, group, ungroup and access Properties panels of components..

The Object Browser is opened by default when you start an Xcelsius session. If you have closed the Object Browser, to re-open click Object Browser Window on the View menu.

Right-click context menuDisplay a context menu by right-clicking on any component in the browser.This is the same menu displayed by right-clicking on a component on the canvas, unless the item is grouped, when the menu displays the common properties of the group.

Selecting componentsTo select a component on the Object Browser click the component name or icon to select the component on the canvas.To select multiple components click a component name or icon to select it, and then hold down the CTRL key while you click the other components, if they are not adjacent to one another. If the components are adjacent hold down the SHIFT key.

18 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 19: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius tools 1

Combine methods by selecting a group of components first with SHIFT+click and then other separate components using CTRL+click. Always select using SHIFT+click first; this won't work in the other order.Select all components by selecting any one component then pressing CTRL+A.Note: You cannot select a component that is marked as hidden.

Hiding componentsTo hide a component on the Object Browser select the check box next to the component name.To hide multiple components select any of the check boxes of a multiple selection.To hide all components select any one component, then press CTRL+A to select all components, and check the box next to any one component.

Grouping componentsSelected objects in the Object Browser can be grouped in the following ways.• Group selected components by right-clicking on any of the selected

components and clicking Group from the context menu.• Select several components in the Object Browser, then click Group on

the toolbar.Once grouped, the components will appear in the browser in tree form with a folder representing the whole group.Expand the group folder by clicking the + button or double-clicking the folder icon or the group label. Once the group is expanded, access the Properties panel for a component within the group by either double-clicking the component or by right-clicking for the context menu. In this way properties can be edited without ungrouping the components.Tip: To ungroup selected components, click Ungroup on the toolbar.

Deleting componentsDelete any selected components by pressing DELETE or selecting Delete from the right-click context menu.Deleting a component can be undone pressing CTRL+Z or clicking Undo on the Edit menu.To delete components within a group you must ungroup them.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 19

Page 20: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius tools1

Opening properties panels

Properties panels for components, either alone or in a group, are opened with the same procedures:• Double-click the icon or label.• Select the component and press ALT+ENTER.• Right-click the component and click Properties.Properties panels that can be opened for a group are opened separately from the Properties panels of individual components within the group:• Right-click the group label or icon and click Properties.• Select the group and press ALT+Enter.Note: Do not double-click a group to open its Properties panel; unlike individual components, double clicking on a group entry expands or collapses that group within the tree.Once a Properties panel is opened for one component you can navigate to the Properties panel of another component by clicking on the entry in the Object Browser.

Renaming componentsEach component is assigned a default browsing name when placed on the canvas. This is the name that appears in the title bar of the Properties panel and in the entry in the Object Browser.You can override these default names to provide your own. Double-click slowly on the component name in the Object Browser, a fast double-click will open the Properties panel. This will put the name in label-edit mode. Edit the name and then press ENTER or click on another component.Note: You cannot rename a component that is marked as hidden.

20 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 21: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius tools 1

Using the Components ExplorerThe Components Explorer shows the available components.

The window contains two views:• A category view where the components are organized in groups in a tree

view according to their functionality.In the category view you can select a specific category and open that folder to see those components that apply to your selection. Xcelsius provides categories that are both frequently used in the market and unique to Xcelsius: • Art & Backgrounds• Charts• Collaboration• Maps• Selectors• Single-Value• Text• Web Connectivity• Other

• A list view where the components are organized alphabetically.In the list view you can select a component alphabetically by name.

Navigating through components in the Components ExplorerYou can navigate to a component within the Components Explorer using either the mouse or keyboard.To navigate with the mouse, double click on the category and any subcategories until you can select the component.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 21

Page 22: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius tools1

To navigate with the keyboard, click anywhere within the category window to select it, and then type the first letter of the category you wish to open. To open a folder when it is selected, use the right arrow key; to close a folder when it is selected, use the left arrow key. To navigate through subcategories type the first letter of the subcategory. You can also move up and down the tree using the up and down arrows.Navigation using keys in the list view of the components operates in the same way, except that there are no folders.Each time a component is selected, a preview of how that component looks on the canvas will appear in the preview window. Folder selection shows a blank in the preview window.

Using the Component Properties panelThe Component Properties panel displays the specific functionality of each component. After you place a component on the canvas area, you can access the Component Properties panel by double-clicking the selected component. In general, the Component Properties panel has the same structure for all components, but the functionality described is specific to each individual component.The Component Properties panel has the following tabs:

• General TabDescribes the basic and minimum required functionality for the selected component. Typically, it contains an area for the title and an area for the Data Source Link or the values that the component represents. See “Step 2: Select the data sources” on page 34 for more information.

22 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 23: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius tools 1

• BehaviorDescribes functions related to the way the component will work on the visualization. Typically, it contains an area for defining the Display Status, entry effects, and functions related to limits and interactivity. See “Dynamic Visibility functionality” on page 74 for more information.

• AlertsContains all the related functionality required when using alerts. On this tab, you can define the number of alert colors, the colors used, and the target or budget. See “Alerts” on page 78 for more information.

• AppearanceContains a series of functions, and in some cases sub-tabs, that let you modify the appearance and final look of each component. On this tab, you will find options like font size, title location, and colors.

• Drill Down Contains a series of parameters for adding drill-down capability for charts.For information on the Drill Down tab, see “Drill Down tab” on page 171.Note: This tab applies only to Chart components.

Component Properties for multiple selectionsBy selecting multiple components on the canvas, you can simultaneously edit Component Properties for each component in your selection. To access Component Properties for multiple components select your components and double click the selection. You can also access the component Properties by right clicking the selection and selecting Properties from the context menu. If the components are of the same type, you will be able to edit Properties specific to that component. For example, if your current selection contains three Line Chart components, you will be able to access the Component Properties specific to the Line Chart. Any change made to the properties will apply to each component in the selection. Component Properties of components of mixed types or groups are limited to the Display Status parameters of the Behavior tab. When a number of components are grouped, the Component Properties for individual components within that group may be edited by right-clicking on that sub-group component in the Object Browser window see “Using the Object Browser” on page 18.

Using the canvasThe canvas area is the white work area where you place components to create a visualization.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 23

Page 24: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius tools1

Placing components on the canvas using drag and drop

To place a component on the canvas area using drag and drop1. On the Components Explorer click a component.2. Holding down the left mouse button, drag the component onto the canvas.3. Release the mouse button.

The component is dropped on the canvas at the location of the mouse pointer.

4. Repeat this procedure for each component.

Placing components on the canvas using point and click To place a component on the canvas area using point and click

1. On the Components Explorer click a component.2. Click the canvas area.3. Repeat this procedure for each component.

Fitting the canvas to componentsAfter you complete your visualization, you may want to adjust its final size to eliminate any surrounding white area. To do this, use the Fit Canvas to Components button on the tool bar. Your visualization size will be adjusted to the optimal size according to the components you are using.In addition, you can use the plus and minus buttons on the toolbar to shrink or grow the canvas in smaller increments.

Fitting the canvas to the windowTo resize the canvas so that it fits in the window, click Fit Canvas to Window on the toolbar.

Changing the canvas sizeYou can change the canvas size before you start creating a visualization by clicking Properties on the File menu. The Document Properties dialog box appears. You can modify the preset size to some standard sizes, or you can create your own size. The ideal size of your visualization depends on the quantity of components that you plan to use.

24 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 25: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius tools 1

If you are building a simple visualization such as a Portlet that contains a chart and slider, the size can be around 640x840. Use the full size screen for dashboards or one-page visualizations that contain several charts and selectors. In the description field, you can write a brief description of your visualization, the author, the date, and its intended functionality. This information will appear to all other designers when they use your XLF file (XLF is the extension to which Xcelsius saves its internal files) or when you save your visualization as a template.

Using the Import Model buttonUse the Import Model button on the tool bar to import the Excel file that contains the data to support your visualization.If it is the first time you are importing an Excel file for the visualization, you must browse for and select the file in the Import Model dialog box. If you have already imported an Excel file into the application, you have the option to either re-import it or select a new one.

Importing a spreadsheet from Excel into Xcelsius1. Click the Import Model button.

The Import Model dialog box appears.2. Click the Browse button.

The Open dialog box appears.3. Select your Excel file and click Open.

You return to the Import Model dialog box.4. Click OK.

Importing an Excel file creates a mirror copy of your Excel file in the Xcelsius application. This mirror copy is independent of your original file. Therefore, if you make changes to your Excel file that affect the Xcelsius visualization, you will have to re-import the Excel file. See “Updating data for a visualization” on page 36 for more instructions.

Using Font OptionsYou can change the font used by components in a visualization by using Font Options on the File menu.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 25

Page 26: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius tools1

Unicode Font OptionsUnicode Font Options provides more options for customizing the font used in the visualization. The following options are available for displaying fonts in Xcelsius: • Embedded Fonts

Xcelsius uses embedded fonts by default. This option generates the characters from the TrueType Font you select, and embeds them into the SWF file. Because the font is embedded in the SWF file, the font displays properly regardless of whether the user has the TrueType Font installed. However, this option also increases the time required to load the visualization, and the file size.Note: Asian character sets are not supported with Embedded Fonts due to the large number of characters they require. You must use Non-Embedded Fonts for situations where you require Asian characters.

• Non-Embedded FontsThis option is recommended when creating models that require the extended character set as defined by Unicode. Non-Embedded Fonts uses the SWF player to directly render the TrueType Font you select. Non-Embedded Fonts also lets you use different fonts for different components in the same visualization. However, depending on the TrueType Fonts installed on the user’s machine, the fonts in the visualization may not display properly. Note: Some components, such as chart components, do not support Non-Embedded Fonts.

To change the font for a visualization1. On the File menu, click Font.

The Font Options dialog box appears.2. Choose the font option that you want.

• If you want to use one embedded font for all components in the visualization:a. On the Font list, click the font that you want.b. Click OK.

• If you want to use a different font for each component in the visualization, or you want to use non-embedded fonts:a. Click Unicode Font Options.b. In the Unicode Font Options dialog box, click Use Non-

Embedded Fonts.

26 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 27: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius tools 1

c. Click OK.You can now use the Font Settings on a component’s Properties panel to change the font used for that component.

Setting the Maximum RowsWith the Maximum Rows command on the Data menu, you can set the maximum number of rows that Xcelsius will allow as a valid data source selection. If you set a large maximum number of rows, the time required to load a visualization will be affected.If you try to specify more rows than the Maximum Rows setting for a data source, a warning message that says “Truncation occurred” will appear.

Using the Format menuThe Format menu provides various options for formatting the appearance of the components in the visualization.

AlignWith the Align options, you can align the bounding boxes of components or groups of components relative to the first component in the selection. Align functions require the selection of at least two components. The following Align options are available: • Left• Center Horizontal• Right• Top• Center Vertical• Bottom

Make Same SizeWith the Make Same Size options, you can make the selected components the same width, height, or size as another component.

Space EvenlyWith the Space Evenly options, you can distribute a selection of components either horizontally (Across) or vertically (Down) so that there are even spaces between them.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 27

Page 28: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUnderstanding the Xcelsius tools1

Center in Document

With the Center in Document options, you can center selected components on the canvas. Note: To use the Center in Document options, you must have more than one component selected. The following options are available:• Vertical• Horizontal• Both

Other commands on the Format menuThe following commands are also available on the Format menu:• Bring to Front

Brings component to the topmost layer.• Send to Back

Sends component to the bottom layer. • Bring Forward

Brings component forward one layer.• Send Back

Sends component back one layer.

Using the Grid ToolThe Grid command on the View menu provides a layout tool that can aid in positioning components on the canvas. The following options for customizing the grid are available:• Show Grid

This option controls the visibility of the grid.• Snap to Grid

This option aligns the selected components to the grid lines.• Vertical Spacing

This option sets the vertical spacing intervals for the grid in pixels.• Horizontal Spacing

This option sets the horizontal spacing intervals for the grid in pixels.

28 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 29: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusCreating backup files in Xcelsius 1

Creating backup files in XcelsiusWith the Options command on the Tools menu, you can set how you want Xcelsius to create backup versions of the XLF file that you are working on:• If you do not want to create a backup XLF file, make sure the options in

the Save Options area are cleared.• If you want to create a backup XLF file, select Always Create a Backup

Copy.• If you want to create a backup XLF file at specific intervals, select

Automatic Backup Save Every, and then set the interval.

Previewing the visualizationWith Xcelsius, you can preview your final visualization as many times as you need. It lets you experiment with various combinations of components, colors, and layouts to make sure your visualization meets your requirements. Use the Preview button to toggle between the design view and preview.In Preview, you can interact with the visualization as you would when it is published.

Viewing sample Xcelsius visualizationsThe sample visualizations included with your deployment of Xcelsius show how some of the components work.

To view sample Xcelsius visualizations1. On the File menu, click Samples.

The Samples dialog box appears.2. In the Category box, click User Guide Samples.3. In the Items box, click the component that you want to view an example of.

A description of the component and a preview of the visualization are shown.4. To view a sample visualization, click OK.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 29

Page 30: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusDynamic and static data sources1

Dynamic and static data sources

Components have two levels of interactions relative to the spreadsheet: • Dynamic• Static

Dynamic data sourcesThe content of the cells can vary during a simulation process and Xcelsius will update its content.

ExampleYou want to create a visualization containing a radio button and a chart, to show the progress of several Human Resources Training Program courses. You need to use the same chart for each course, so that your visualization is simple and dynamic. It will look like this:

Using Dynamic Data Sources lets the chart data change with each selection you make on the radio button. The radio button inserts a row that contains the data for each course on a range that is linked to the chart. Since the chart contains the Dynamic Link on the Data Source, the chart content changes with each selection you make on the radio button. This is described in more detail in “Using the Selector components” on page 48.

30 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 31: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusUsing templates 1

Static data sourcesThe content of the cells won't vary during the simulation; therefore, Xcelsius won't update its content.

ExampleThe Human Resources chart using the chart and radio button components while remaining dynamic in functionality can also have a static data source. The Display Status Key imported value determines the visibility of the chart. The value can be set to display the chart when the visualization is run. The Display Status Key value is fixed so that the chart will always display. For example, if you link the chart to a Display Status Key cell with a value of 0.25999 and manually change the value in the Display Status Key box, when the visualization is run the chart will not be visible as the Display Status values do not match.

Using templatesXcelsius offers a set of templates you can use to create a new visualization. You can use the existing Xcelsius templates, or you can create a visualization from scratch and save it as a template. For more information on creating and using templates, see “Creating templates” on page 104.

Global StylesGlobal Styles are a set of appearance parameters that let you change the default visuals of new components. You can also apply Global Styles to existing visualizations to change their overall appearance. Style parameters are broken up into three major categories: • Styles• Text & Labels• Buttons and Backgrounds. In the Styles category you will find Markers, Lines and Borders. All components can be generally defined as being constructed of certain pieces, those pieces can be grouped in the above categories. These categories, when defined as a whole, create the global style. These parameters consist of only color parameters and do not affect fonts, text formatting or alerts.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 31

Page 32: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Getting to Know Crystal XcelsiusGlobal Styles1

Note: Global Styles are not transferred with Xcelsius authoring file, or XLF files. Opening an XLF does not load the Global Style used in the XLF into the machine it is opened on. If the Global Style used by an XLF is unavailable, the style will continue to be used by the existing components in the visualization, but it will not be able to be applied to new components. For more information see “Using Global Styles” on page 105.

32 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 33: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Creating and updating Crystal Xcelsius visualizations

chapter

Page 34: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Creating and updating Crystal Xcelsius visualizationsOverview2

Overview

This chapter introduces the process of creating and maintaining Xcelsius visualizations.

Creating a visualization To create an Xcelsius visualization

1. Import the Microsoft Excel file that contains the data to be used in the visualization.

2. Link the Xcelsius components to the spreadsheet. 3. Preview the visualization and publish it.

Step 1: Import the Excel fileThe first step for creating an Xcelsius visualization is to import an existing Microsoft Excel file that contains the data you want to use in your visualization.

Importing a spreadsheet from Excel into Xcelsius1. On the Data menu, click Import Model.

The Import Model dialog box appears.Tip: You can also access the Import Model dialog box by clicking the Import Model button on the tool bar.

2. Click the Browse button.The Open dialog box appears.

3. Select your Excel file and click Open.You return to the Import Model dialog box.

4. Click OK.Note: The Excel file is imported into the Xcelsius application as a copy of your original file. You can continue making changes or modifications in your original file and then re-import the Excel file. See “Updating data for a visualization” on page 36 for detailed steps.

Step 2: Select the data sourcesThe second step for creating an Xcelsius visualization is to select the data sources linked to the components. With this step, you assign one or more cells from your imported Excel file to one or more Xcelsius components.

34 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 35: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Creating and updating Crystal Xcelsius visualizationsCreating a visualization 2

ExampleYou need to show Revenues by Store using a Column Chart, and the Price per Unit using a Horizontal Slider.

Selecting the data source for the components1. Place the components on the canvas.2. Double-click the column chart component to open the Properties panel.

For more information, see “Using the Component Properties panel” on page 22.

3. Click the Data Range cell selector button.4. Select the range of cells that contain the data for the column chart from

the imported spreadsheet, and click OK.5. Type or link the chart title and subtitle.6. Type or link the axis names and category labels.7. Click the horizontal slider component to open the Properties panel.8. Click the Link to Cell cell selector button.9. Select the Price Per Unit cell from the imported spreadsheet, and click OK.

Step 3: Previewing and publishing the visualizationThe third step is to preview and publish the visualization. You can see a preview of the live visualization, test the simulation result, make the required adjustments, and finally, generate the SWF or Flash animation that contains the visualization. Then the visualization is ready for publishing and distribution. You can use the Preview button on the tool bar to toggle between the design view and preview. In preview, you can interact with the visualization as you would when it is published.Once you are satisfied with the results of the preview, the visualization is ready to be published. You can publish your visualization using one of the following methods: • Export as Macromedia Flash (SWF)• Export as HTML• Export to Microsoft PowerPoint• Export as Adobe PDF• Email Content Using Microsoft Outlook• Export to Microsoft Word• Export to BusinessObjects Enterprise

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 35

Page 36: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Creating and updating Crystal Xcelsius visualizationsUpdating data for a visualization2

See “Exporting Crystal Xcelsius Visualizations” on page 109 for more information.

Updating data for a visualizationThe Export Settings command on the File menu lets you specify how you want to update data. You can re-import the Excel file and replace the entire visualization, or you can create more customized and sustainable data replacement methods. The following options for updating the data in your visualization are available: • Use Current Excel Data

This option takes the data as it exists in the currently imported visualization. This is the default option.

• Use Another Excel File This option lets you specify a different Excel file from which to take data at export time.

• Use Web Service This option allows the exported visualization to get data dynamically from an external XML data source. For more information, see “Using the Use Web Service Option” on page 79.

• Use Flash Variables This option allows the exported SWF file to be updated through the FlashVars property of the Macromedia Flash Player. For more information, see “Using Flash Variables to update a visualization” on page 85 for more information.

Re-importing the Excel fileWhen you are creating a visualization you may need to re-import the Excel file into Xcelsius. This is normally because you have decided to add or modify the data in the spreadsheet. Since Xcelsius makes a copy of the original Excel file and imports the copy, when you make changes to the original Excel file, you will have to re-import it. When re-importing the Excel file, be aware that if you inserted rows, columns or data, the links that you previously created may be damaged. Xcelsius will keep the link as a static reference. For example, if originally you linked a chart to the range A2:H2, and after that you modified the Excel file the chart range is now A3:H3, you will need to manually adjust the link after re-importing the Excel file. Xcelsius will continue using the range A2:H2 until you manually change the link.

36 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 37: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Creating and updating Crystal Xcelsius visualizationsUpdating data for a visualization 2

To re-import the Excel file1. On the View menu, click Import Model.

Tip: You can also re-import the Excel file by clicking the Import Model button on the tool bar.

2. Select the Excel file to be imported.3. Select the re-import method.

For more information, see the list following this procedure.4. Click OK.The Import Model dialog box provides the following options for specifying how data in the re-imported spreadsheet interacts with the existing links in the visualization:• Refresh Data Sources

This action will import the selected spreadsheet. Use this option when the Excel file is the same or with small changes and you need to keep all previous links. All previously established links to the spreadsheet will be saved. However, if since the last import you have inserted, deleted or modified rows, column or data, it is possible that the links will be affected. Review the links before saving the visualization.

• Clear Data SourcesThis action will import the selected spreadsheet and all previously established links will be lost. Use this option when the Excel file is significantly different and you need to delete all the links.

• Refresh Spreadsheet FormatThis option is available only when Refresh Data Sources is selected. Use this option when some spreadsheet formatting parameters have changed which you want updated.

• Refresh Live OfficeUse this option to manually refresh the spreadsheet against the latest Live Office data before you re-import the spreadsheet.

Re-importing with renamed sheetsRe-importing a spreadsheet that has a sheet that has been renamed will cause all links and formulas to be lost. A warning message will recommend two things:• Use the same sheet name.• Re-import using the Clear Data Sources option.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 37

Page 38: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Creating and updating Crystal Xcelsius visualizationsUpdating data for a visualization2

Using the Use Another Excel File option

With the Use Another Excel File option you can generate SWF files that use different data than the Excel file that the visualization currently uses.

ExampleIn a visualization that uses the retail price to calculate the expected revenue, you want Xcelsius to update a single cell while maintaining the original imported values in all other cells.

To replace data from another Excel spreadsheet1. On the Data menu, click Replace Data Selection.

The Replace Data Selection dialog box appears.2. Click Add.3. In the Range Name box, type “Retail Price”.4. Click the Range Selection cell selector button.

The imported spreadsheet and the Select a Range dialog box appear.5. Select the Retail Price cell and click OK.

Only the selected cells will be modified each time the Excel spreadsheet is re-imported.You return to the Replace Data Selection dialog box.

6. Click OK.7. On the File menu, click Export Settings.

The Export Settings dialog box appears.8. Click Use Another Excel File.9. Click the Browse button and navigate to the Excel file to be used as the

new data source.10. On the File menu, point to Export, and click Macromedia Flash (SWF).

The SWF file using the new data source is generated.11. With your visualization on the canvas, on the Data menu, click Replace

Data Selection.This function lets you select the cell(s) that you want Xcelsius to modify each time the Excel file is re-imported. All other cells will remain the same.

You have created a sustainable visualization. The new SWF will take the latest Retail Price available from the Excel file. When the Retail Price changes, all you have to do is to generate a new SWF file. All other cells not affected by the Retail Price will remain the same.

38 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 39: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Creating and updating Crystal Xcelsius visualizationsUpdating data for a visualization 2

Using Excel 2003 with XML Maps with XcelsiusXcelsius supports the XML functionality that is new to Excel 2003. Excel 2003 supports the ability to embed XML documents and schemas into a spreadsheet. These files can be imported into Xcelsius, and SWF files that retain the link to the XML source generated.Note: • These XML features are not available with the version of Excel 2003 that

is included in the following Microsoft Office 2003 products:• Microsoft Office Standard Edition 2003 • Microsoft Office Small Business Edition 2003 • Microsoft Office Student and Teacher Edition 2003 Users of these products can still import and export XML files from a previously mapped spreadsheet.

• Data that has been mapped using the Excel 2003 mapping functionality can be manually refreshed by using a XML Map Refresh button in your visualization.

Building the visualizationAfter the Excel 2003 file has been set up, the next step is to build your visualization and configure the XML Map Options. For information on setting up the Excel 2003 file with an XML map, refer to the on-line help in Microsoft Excel.

ExampleYou want to create a visualization that lists stock market quotes for several companies based on data in an XML file.After the data has been imported into your Excel file you can use Xcelsius to build a visualization that retains the link to the XML data source. This means that changes to the XML file will be reflected in the exported SWF file. This visualization will display share price information for several companies. The stock information is contained in an XML file that has been imported into the Excel file and mapped to a range of cells. A Table component has been tied to the range of cells to visualize the data.

To build an Xcelsius visualization using an Excel spreadsheet with an XML map1. Import the Excel 2003 file.

For more information on how to import an Excel file into Xcelsius see “Step 1: Import the Excel file” on page 34.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 39

Page 40: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Creating and updating Crystal Xcelsius visualizationsUpdating data for a visualization2

2. Place a table component on the canvas.3. Double-click the table component to open the Properties panel.4. Click the Display Data cell selector button.5. Select the range of data in the imported spreadsheet, and click OK.6. On the Data menu, click XML Map Option.

The XML Maps dialog box appears.7. In the Map Name box, select the XML maps to be included in the SWF file.

The range of cells that make up the XML Map will be exported with the data that was in the Excel cells when the Excel file was imported into Xcelsius.

8. In the URL box, type the URL for the source file.Tip: You can also click the URL cell selector button to select the URL from the imported spreadsheet.

9. Set the value in the Refresh every n seconds box.The default value for this option is 0. When this option is set to 0 the SWF file will only query the URL when the SWF file is first loaded. A value greater than 0 will query the URL when the SWF file loads and will continue to query the URL.

10. Export the visualization.For more information, see “Exporting Crystal Xcelsius Visualizations” on page 109.

Once the visualization has been exported you can open the exported SWF file in your web browser. Changes made to the XML file will be reflected in your SWF file.

40 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 41: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Using Crystal Xcelsius Components

chapter

Page 42: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsOverview3

Overview

This chapter introduces the Crystal Xcelsius components and their most relevant functionality.

Using chart componentsEach type of chart functions in a particular way appropriate to different types of visualizations:• Bubble Chart

A chart that lets you compare a group or series of items based on three different parameters. It has an X-axis and Y-axis to represent the item location over the chart area, and a Z value to represent the item size. You could use this chart to represent the market composition with the X-axis representing the ROI by industry type, the Y-axis representing the Cash Flow, and the Z-axis representing the Market Value.

• Line ChartA single- or multi-line chart ideal for showing tendency over a period of time. Use this chart in visualizations that emphasize a trend line, such as Stock Prices or Revenue History.

• Pie ChartA chart that represents the distribution or participation of each slice or item over a certain total that is represented on the overall pie value. The pie chart is appropriate for visualizations, such as Revenue Contribution by Product. The overall pie size represents the total revenues. Each slice represents a different product.

• XY ChartA chart that displays data requiring two magnitudes to complete the analysis. The XY chart shows each data point as a result of the intersection of X values and Y values. You can use the XY chart in visualizations that compare ROI on the X axis against Market Value on the Y axis for a group of companies.

• Combination ChartA combination column and line chart ideal for displaying a range of values and a trend line for those values. You can use the combination chart in visualizations examining stocks. A line series will show the historical stock price over the year, and a column chart will show the volume of trading for that stock.

42 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 43: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing chart components 3

• Bar Chart and Column ChartA single- or multi-bar chart that shows and compares one or more items over a period of time or in a specific range of values. You could use a column chart in visualizations that contain the quarterly headcount by region.

• Stacked Column Chart and Stacked Bar ChartA chart that compares several variables over a period of time. Stacked bars compare one or more variables by adding one variable on top of another. This chart compares several variables over a period of time such as Marketing Cost, General Cost, Administrative Cost. Each one of the cost components is presented in a different color and each portion represents a different variable. The total bar size represents the Total Cost.

• Area ChartA standard chart with vertical and horizontal axes. Each point along the horizontal axis represents a data point. The actual values for each data point are plotted against the vertical axis. For each series, colored areas are created by connecting the plotted points and the horizontal axis. Use this chart in visualizations that emphasize a trend line, such as Stock Prices or Revenue History.

• Radar Chart and Filled Radar ChartA chart with axes that radiate outwards from the center of the chart. These charts can have several axes. They are useful for plotting multi-dimensional sets of data. In the filled radar chart, the shape created by connecting the points along each axis is filled in with color. You could use the radar charts to compare aspects of stocks. One axis could display the price, another the volume, another the Price to Earnings ratio, and others any other relevant data on.

• Stacked Area ChartA standard chart with vertical and horizontal axes. Each point along the horizontal axis represents a data point. The actual values for the data points are plotted against the vertical axis, with each series adding to the total value. You could use the stacked area chart to compare the revenue for multiple products as well as the combined revenue of all the products and the contribution of each product to that combined revenue.

• OHLC Chart and Candlestick ChartThe open-high-low-close and candlestick charts are primarily used to display stock data. Each marker corresponds to the four values, which are represented as lines attached to the marker on the OHLC chart and as colors on the candlestick chart. Open displays the opening price of the

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 43

Page 44: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing chart components3

stock. High displays the highest price the stock achieved on that day. Low displays the lowest price the of the stock on that day. Close displays the closing price of the stock.

How to create a chartCreating a chart in Xcelsius is similar to creating a chart in Excel. The minimum requirement is to have a list of values in an adjacent range of cells. After this, you can enhance your chart with some basic information such as Title, Subtitle, Axis Titles and Series Names.

ExampleTo create an Xcelsius visualization that shows the Revenues per Store for a Car Dealer company, you will need an Excel file that contains an adjacent range of cells with this information.

To create an Xcelsius visualization with a chart component1. Import the Excel spreadsheet into Xcelsius.

For information on importing spreadsheets into Xcelsius, see “Using the Import Model button” on page 25.

2. Place a column chart on the canvas.3. Double-click the column chart component to open the Properties panel.4. Type the title of the chart in the Chart Title box.

Tip: You can also click the Chart Title cell selector button to select the chart title from the imported spreadsheet.

5. Type the subtitle of the chart in the Chart Subtitle box.Tip: You can also click the Chart Subtitle cell selector button to select the chart subtitle from the imported spreadsheet.

6. Click the Data Range cell selector button and select the range of values from the imported spreadsheet.The data range is the list of values to be presented on the chart component. Select the full range of values you want to display on the chart component.

7. Type the axis name in the Category (X) Axis box.Tip: You can also click the Category (X) Axis cell selector button to select the axis name from the imported spreadsheet.

8. Type the axis name in the Value (Y) Axis box.Tip: You can also click the Value (Y) Axis cell selector button to select the axis name from the imported spreadsheet.

44 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 45: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing chart components 3

Note: In some cases, you must create a multiple bar chart. To do this, select the Series options and select one or more series. Each series represents one group of bars that are represented with the same color.

Sample visualization: Drill Down Chart functionalityXcelsius charts can behave as selectors. Including selector functionality in the charts lets you create visualizations that have drill-down charting functionality.This example creates a visualization that displays a pie chart that contains yearly sales data for several branches. When the user clicks on a slice of pie for a given branch the visualization will display the monthly sales data for that branch on a column chart.Note: You can find the spreadsheet, sample XLF file, and sample SWF file for this visualization in the following location:C:\Program Files\Business Objects\Crystal Xcelsius Designer 4.5\samples\User Guide Samples

To create an Xcelsius visualization with a chart with drill-down functionality1. Import the Excel spreadsheet into Xcelsius.

For this example the spreadsheet should contain monthly sales data for different branches.For information on importing spreadsheets into Xcelsius, see “Using the Import Model button” on page 25.

2. Place a pie chart component on the canvas.3. Place a column chart component on the canvas below the pie chart

component.4. Double-click the pie chart component to open the Properties panel.5. Click the Data Range cell selector button and select the data range from

the imported spreadsheet.For this example, select the cells that contain the sales totals for the individual branches.

6. On the Drill Down tab, click Enable Drill- Down.The Drill Down options for the pie chart component can now be configured.

7. On the Insert Value list, click Rows.This will let you insert a row of data for each item that is placed in the Destination pane.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 45

Page 46: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing single value components3

8. Click the Insert Value In cell selector button and select an empty row of cells from the imported spreadsheet.Note: The cells must be empty or the drill down functionality will be compromised.

9. Click the Source Data cell selector button and select the source data from the imported spreadsheet.For this example, the range of cells should contain the monthly sales data for the branches.

10. Close the Properties panel for the pie chart component.11. Double-click the column chart component to open the Properties panel.12. Click the Data Range cell selector button and select an empty row of

cells from the imported spreadsheet.For this example, the range of cells must be empty as it will have the data on the monthly sales of the branch selected on the pie chart inserted into the row.

13. Click the Chart Title cell selector button and select an empty cell.For this example, the cell must be empty as the title for the chart selected on the pie chart component will be inserted into this cell.

14. Close the Properties panel for the column chart component.15. Click the Preview button to view the interaction between the pie chart

and the column chart components. As you click on slices of the Pie Chart, the column chart will update to show the monthly sales data for the selected branch.

Using single value componentsSingle value components let you add user interactivity to your visualizations. Single value means that the components are linked to a single cell in the spreadsheet. After that, the component lets you modify or represent the value of that cell.Each component can be used to customize the interactivity of a visualization:• Dial

An input component. A dial represents a variable that can be modified to affect other components. For example, to represent the Price per Unit.

• SliderAn input component. A slider represents a variable that can be modified to affect other components. For example, to represent the Price per Unit.

46 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 47: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing single value components 3

• Progress BarAn output component. A progress bar represents a value that changes and fills the progress bar area depending on its value.

• GaugeAn output component. The gauge measures the result of changes in the Excel cell to which it is linked. If you link the gauge to a cell that contains a formula, the gauge reflects the modifications each time the value changes.

• ValueAn input when bound to a cell containing a formula, and an output when bound to a cell containing a value. The value component represents a single cell of your Excel file.

• SpinnerAn input component. A spinner represents a variable that can be modified to affect other components. Users can interact with the spinner by clicking the up and down arrows or by typing a value into the text box.

• Play ButtonAn input component. The play button is used to increase the value of a cell in your visualization. For example, link the play button to a cell that contains the headcount. What will happen if the headcount increases by one, two, three, or more? The play button takes the initial headcount value and increases its value systematically.

Input vs. outputSingle value components have been classified as input and output components, but you can use any single value component and represent it as an input or output. However, what really dictates whether a single value component is an input, that is permits user interaction, or output, is the cell to which it is linked. If the cell contains a formula of any type, the component is interpreted as an output. If the cell does not contain a formula, it is represented as an input.For example, if you have a slider linked to a cell that does not contain a formula, you can modify the slider value by dragging the slider object, thereby modifying the cell value. If you have a slider linked to a cell that does contain a formula, you cannot modify the slider value.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 47

Page 48: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the Selector components3

Sample visualization: value component

A store supervisor wants to measure the effect that increasing or decreasing the price of an X product has over a certain level of products normally sold over a period of time. Price per Unit is the variable that we want to modify. This cell affects the revenues for all stores. Quantity sold is the normal volume of products sold over a period of time. Revenues are calculated as quantity * price. Note: You can find the spreadsheet, sample XLF file, and sample SWF file for this visualization in the following location:C:\Program Files\Business Objects\Crystal Xcelsius Designer

4.5\samples\User Guide Samples

To create an Xcelsius visualization using a value component and a chart component1. Import the spreadsheet into Xcelsius.

For information on importing spreadsheets into Xcelsius, see “Using the Import Model button” on page 25.

2. Place a column chart component on the canvas and configure it.For information on configuring the column chart component, see “Using chart components” on page 42.

3. Place a value component on the canvas in the upper-left corner.4. Double-click the value component to open the Properties panel.5. Click the Link to Cell cell selector button and select the price per unit cell

from the imported spreadsheet.6. Customize the appearance of the value component.You can increase or decrease the Price per Unit by dragging the Value Component. Double-clicking the Value component lets you type in the value. As the Value Component is linked to a cell that affects the Revenues, the chart dynamically changes to reflect the new revenues by store.

Using the Selector componentsThe functionality of selector components lets you create a visualization with multiple selections. Each selector can be combined with other components to create a dynamic visualization:• Combo Box

A standard user-interface component that drops down a vertical list of items when it is clicked. Users can then select an item from the list.

48 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 49: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the Selector components 3

• List BoxA standard user-interface component that lets users select items from a vertical list.

• Label Based MenuThe component lets users to select items from a vertical or horizontal list.

• Radio ButtonThe component lets users select from a vertical or horizontal group of items.

• Fish-Eye Picture MenuWith the fish-eye picture menu, users select from a set of pictures or icons. As the mouse is moved over each item in the menu, the item is magnified. The closer the mouse is to the center of the item, the more the item is magnified. This creates an effect similar to that of a fish-eye lens.

• Sliding Picture MenuWith the sliding picture menu, users select from a set of icons or pictures. The users can use arrows to scroll through the icons or the menu can be configured to scroll through the items as the user moves the mouse. With each selection that is made, data corresponding to that selection is inserted into a range in the spreadsheet. All of the menu components are used to provide navigation for your visualization.

• Table and List ViewThe table component is a What You See Is What You Get representation of any group of cells from your Excel file. Each row allows multiple selections. The list view component has the same functionality as the table component, but lets the user sort the columns and adjust the width of the columns in the exported SWF file.Note: The table component can be used as a display component as well as a selector component. As a display component, the table is a graphic representation of a range of cells in the spreadsheet. Click the Display Data cell selector button and select a range of cells from the spreadsheet. To use the table as a selector component, after setting the Display Data range, set the Insert Option to rows.

• TickerThe ticker component displays horizontally scrolling text in your visualization.

• Check BoxA standard user-interface component where users toggle between two states: checked and unchecked.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 49

Page 50: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the Selector components3

Note: When using the check Box component you must specify settings to control the movement between the checked and unchecked states. Click the Source Data Browse button and set the values that will control whether the check Box component appears checked or unchecked. Click the Insert In cell selector button and select an empty cell that will display the value that reflect whether the check box is checked or unchecked.

• IconThe icon can be used as a mobile selector or object. It can represent the value contained in one cell and be compared to its target or budget value. The Icon changes color depending on its value. See “Alerts” on page 78 for more information. At the same time, you can use the Icon to activate and display other components. See “Dynamic Visibility functionality” on page 74 for more information. Note: When using the Icon component you must specify settings to control the movement between the checked and unchecked states. Click the Source Data Browse button and set the values that will control whether the Icon component appears checked or unchecked. Click the Insert In cell selector button and select an empty cell that will display the value that reflect whether the Icon component is checked or unchecked.

• Toggle ButtonA standard user-interface component that lets users toggle between two states: on and off.

• FilterThe filter component takes a range of data that shares a common number of items and filters the content so that there are no duplicated records.

• List BuilderThe list builder provides a way for end-users to build their own sets of data. This set of data can then be used to populate another component.

• Accordion MenuThe accordion menu is a two-level menu that lets users first select a category and then select from items within that particular category.

• Source Data ComponentA component that has no visual interface. Users can push data into other cells by changing the value of the component's Selected Index.

• Play SelectorThe play selector sequentially inserts one row or column from a defined range into the Insert In cells you defined. You can link the Insert In cells to a chart so that the chart data changes each time the play selector inserts

50 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 51: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the Selector components 3

a row or column. The play selector component can display a large amount of data with a movie effect which lets users view the data without clicking on each selection.

Note: The Information button that appears on the Properties panel of each selector component displays an animation that describes the functionality of the selector component.

Sample visualization: filter componentThe filter component is a selector that can present a large amount of data. The filter component can be used to create a visualization with drill down navigation that can use two or more interrelated combo boxes. The filter component takes a range of data that shares a common number of items and filters the content so that there are no duplicated records.When a selection is made on the filter component, the corresponding data is inserted in the Insert In cells you specified.The Insert In cells can be used as source data for a chart component. You can, for example, use the filter component to display the Sales per Sales Representative for a group of products that is organized by New Customers and Existing Customers. Note: You can find the spreadsheet, sample XLF file, and sample SWF file for this visualization in the following location:C:\Program Files\Business Objects\Crystal Xcelsius Designer

4.5\samples\User Guide Samples

To create an Xcelsius visualization with a filter component and a chart component1. Import the Excel spreadsheet into Xcelsius.

For information on importing spreadsheets into Xcelsius, see “Using the Import Model button” on page 25.

2. Place a filter component at the top of the canvas.3. Double-click the filter component to open the Properties panel.4. Click the Source Data cell selector button and select all the data to be

included in the visualization.For this example, the range of cells should include the data to be filtered by as well as the data to be filtered.

5. Click the Insert In cell selector button and select an empty row of cells.For this example, the range of cells must be empty as the data corresponding to the selections made on the Filter component will be inserted in the range of cells.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 51

Page 52: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the Selector components3

6. Adjust the value in the Number of Filters box.For this example, set three filters: Product, Sales Representative, and Account Type.

7. Click the Title cell selector button and select the cell containing the title of the visualization.

8. Close the Properties panel.9. Place a bar chart component on the canvas below the filter component.

For information on configuring the bar chart component, see “Using chart components” on page 42.

Sample visualization: list builder componentThe list builder provides a way for end-users to build their own sets of data. This set of data is then used to populate another component. Like other selectors, the list builder can be used to populate other components with data or in conjunction with Dynamic Visibility to show and hide components. Users can add and remove elements from the Destination data set in a number of ways:• Double-click items in either the Source or Destination list to move the

item to the other list. • Items can be dragged from one list to another. • The central buttons of the list builder will move the selected item in the

corresponding direction. When the Update button is pressed, the list builder inserts the Source Data corresponding to the items in the Destination list into the Insert In range. The Source Data is inserted in the order specified in the Destination list. To change the ordering, the items in the Destination set can be dragged up or down. For example, you can create a visualization that lets the user select from a list of branches to see the quarterly sales data for those branches. The user will build a list of branches that they want to see and then click on the Update button to see the selected data in a line chart.Note: You can find the spreadsheet, sample XLF file, and sample SWF file for this visualization in the following location:C:\Program Files\Business Objects\Crystal Xcelsius Designer

4.5\samples\User Guide Samples

To create an Xcelsius visualization with a list builder component and a chart component1. Import the Excel spreadsheet into Xcelsius.

52 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 53: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the Selector components 3

For this example, the spreadsheet contains the yearly sales data for the different branches.For information on importing spreadsheets into Xcelsius, see “Using the Import Model button” on page 25.

2. Place a list builder component on the canvas.3. Place a line chart component on the canvas below the list builder

component.4. Double-click the list builder component to open the Properties panel.5. Click the Labels cell selector button and select the range from the

imported spreadsheet.For this example, the range of cells contains the list of branches that the user will be able to choose from.

6. On the Insert Option list, click Rows.This lets us insert a row of data for each item that is placed in the Destination pane.

7. Click the Source Data cell selector button and select the range of cells from the imported spreadsheet.For this example, the range of cells should contain the table of yearly sales data for the branches.

8. Click the Insert In cell selector button and select a range of empty cells the same size as the range of source data from the imported spreadsheet.The range must be empty so that values can be inserted in the range when selections are made on the list builder component. The range must be the same size as the range of source data to allow for all the options available in the source data to be inserted in the Destination list on the list builder component.

9. Close the list builder component Properties panel.10. Double-click the line chart component to open the Properties panel.11. Click the Data Range cell selector button and select the range of cells

from the imported spreadsheet.For this example, the range of cells should contain the data for the items that were selected in the list builder component.

12. On the Behavior tab, in the Range Options area, click Series: Ignore End Blanks, and Values: Ignore End Blanks if they are not selected.This will ensure that the Line Chart only displays the data for the items that were selected in the List Builder.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 53

Page 54: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the Selector components3

13. Click the Preview button to view the visualization in interactive format.Move some of the branches from the Source pane to the Destination pane. Click on the Update button. The Line Chart will update to show the yearly sales data for the selected Branches.

Sample visualization: accordion menu componentThe accordion menu is a two-level menu that lets users first select a category and then select from items within the category. When a category is selected, the category name is inserted into the Insert Category In cell you defined. The selected category is expanded to display the list of items specific to that category; the other categories are collapsed. When an item is selected within a category, the corresponding Source Data is inserted into the Insert Item In cell you defined. When the list of categories or the list of items within one category becomes larger than the space available, a scroll bar is automatically added to let users scroll through all of the available items. You can, for example create a visualization that shows sales data for all the Sales Representatives of a company organized by region.Note: You can find the spreadsheet, sample XLF file, and sample SWF file for this visualization in the following location:C:\Program Files\Business Objects\Crystal Xcelsius Designer

4.5\samples\User Guide Samples

To create an Xcelsius visualization with an accordion menu component and a chart component1. Import the Excel spreadsheet into Xcelsius.

For information on importing spreadsheets into Xcelsius, see “Using the Import Model button” on page 25.

2. Place an accordion menu component on the left side of the canvas.3. Place a column chart component on the right side of the canvas.4. Double-click the accordion menu component to open the Properties panel.5. Click Add to add a category.

For this example, you will create a category for each region.6. Click the Name cell selector button and select the first region name.

Note: You can also type the region name in the Name box.

54 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 55: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the Selector components 3

7. Click the Items cell selector button and select the items to be listed under that particular category.For this example, the range of cells should contain the names or identification numbers of the sales representatives within the selected region.

8. Click the Source Data cell selector button and select the data corresponding to the items in the category.For this example, the range of cells should contain the sales data for the sales representatives in the selected region.

9. Repeat steps 5-8 for each region.10. Click the Insert Item In cell selector button and select an empty range of

cells.For this example, the range of cells must be empty so that the data for the selected category can be inserted in the range of cells. The range of cells must be large enough to contain the inserted data.

11. Close the Properties panel.12. Double-click the column chart component to open the Properties panel.13. Click the Data Range cell selector button and select an empty row of cells.

For this example, the range of cells must be empty so that the data corresponding to the selections made on the accordion menu component can be inserted in the range.

14. Click the Chart Title cell selector button and select an empty cell in the item column.This cell displays the name or identification number of the sales representative whose data is being shown.

15. Click Preview.As you click on the different sales representatives from each region, the chart will display the monthly sales data for that particular sales representative.

Sample visualization: Sliding Picture menu componentThe sliding picture menu is a menu where users can select from a set of icons or pictures. The users can use arrows to scroll through the icons or the menu can be configured to scroll through the items as the user moves the mouse. With each selection that is made, data corresponding to that selection is inserted into a range in the spreadsheet.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 55

Page 56: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the Selector components3

You can, for example create a visualization that lets the user select from a list of products to see the yearly sales data for that product. The sliding picture menu contains a set of thumbnail images that the user can scroll through. When the user selects an image from the sliding picture menu the sales data for that product is displayed in a column chart.Note: You can find the spreadsheet, sample XLF file, and sample SWF file for this visualization in the following location:C:\Program Files\Business Objects\Crystal Xcelsius Designer

4.5\samples\User Guide Samples

To create an Xcelsius visualization with a sliding picture menu component and a chart component1. Import the Excel spreadsheet into Xcelsius.

For information on importing spreadsheets into Xcelsius, see “Using the Import Model button” on page 25.The Excel file contains the list of images that the sliding picture menu will display as thumbnails for the user to click on.

2. Place a sliding picture menu component on the top of the canvas.3. Place a column chart on the canvas beneath the sliding picture menu

component.4. Double-click the sliding picture menu component to open the Properties

panel.5. Click the Labels cell selector button and select the cells containing the

data to be displayed as labels on the sliding picture menu component.For this example, select the list of products.

6. Click URL to enable the URL cell selector button.7. Click the URL cell selector button and select the range of cells containing

the image files from the imported spreadsheet.Selecting the image files tells the sliding picture menu to load the thumbnail images from a folder called images that will be in the same location as the exported SWF file.

8. On the Insert Option list, click a behavior type.For this example, click rows so that a row of data is inserted when the user selects an item. This row of data will be the source data for the column chart.

9. Click the Source Data cell selector button and select the range of cells containing the data to be inserted into the Insert In cells when a selection is made on the sliding picture menu component.

56 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 57: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the map component 3

For this example, the range of cells should contain the yearly sales data for the products.Note: The Source Data box is not available with all behavior options on the Insert Option list.

10. Click the Insert In cell selector button and select an empty row of cells.For this example, the range of cells must be empty so that the data corresponding to the selection made on the sliding picture menu component can be inserted in the range of cells.

11. Close the Properties panel.12. Double-click the column chart component to open the Properties panel.13. Click the Data Range cell selector button and select the row of cells you

selected as the Insert In range of the sliding picture menu component other than the cell in the label column.For this example, the range of cells should contain the yearly sales data for the currently selected item in the sliding picture menu.

14. Configure the column chart component.For information on configuring chart components, see “Using chart components” on page 42.

Note: When you export the visualization, be sure to export your SWF file to the directory that contains the images folder so that the thumbnail images load properly.

Using the map componentMap components create visualizations with geographical representations that can be displayed by region.The map component has two major characteristics. It shows data for each region; each region can also act as a Selector. By combining these two features, you can create a visualization where the data for each region appears when you pass the pointer over the region. At the same time, each region can insert a row of data that contains additional information. This row of data is displayed on other components, such as a chart or a set of single value components.

How does it work?Xcelsius associates data with each region in the map by using region codes. Each region in the map has a defined region code. When Source Data, Display Data, or Target Data is selected, the map component searches either

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 57

Page 58: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the map component3

the first column or first row of the range for the defined codes. When a code is found, the data in the matching row or column is then associated with the corresponding region. By default, the USA map uses the postal abbreviations as its region codes, and the Europe map uses the ISO, or International Organization for Standardization, two-digit country codes for its region codes. To use the map components with existing spreadsheets, you can edit the region codes associated with each region by editing the region names.Note: In the Excel file you must identify the state code and data in an adjacent range of cells for each type of selection: Display Data, Source Data, and Inset In Range.

Sample visualization: map componentFor example, you can create a visualization that shows the revenues by state for a retail company, where when a user clicks or passes the pointer over a state, the state inserts a row of data that populates a column chart showing the historic revenue trend.Note: You can find the spreadsheet, sample XLF file, and sample SWF file for this visualization in the following location:C:\Program Files\Business Objects\Crystal Xcelsius Designer

4.5\samples\User Guide Samples

To create an Xcelsius visualization with a map component and a chart component1. Import the Excel spreadsheet into Xcelsius.

For information on importing spreadsheets into Xcelsius, see “Using the Import Model button” on page 25.

2. Place a map component on the canvas.3. Click the Region Names cell selector button.

By default, the USA map has the list of the 48 continental states plus Washington D.C. in alphabetical order. Before using the map, you must indicate the codes to which each state is going to be identified on the Excel file. For example, you can choose AL for Alabama and CA for California. The USA map identifies the data corresponding to a cell that contains the code AL as being the data for Alabama and the cell that contains CA as being the data for California.

4. Click the Region Names Browse button to verify that each state is linked to the correct state code.

58 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 59: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the art and background components 3

5. Click the Display Data cell selector button and select the cells containing the State Codes and the state data from the imported spreadsheet.

6. Click the Source Data cell selector button and select the cells containing the State Codes and the state data from the imported spreadsheet.This step configures the map component to act as a a selector.

7. Click the Insert In cell selector button and select an empty range of cells.For this example, the range of cells must be empty as the range of data for the state selected on the map component will be inserted into the range of cells.

8. Place a column chart component on the canvas above the map component.9. Click the Data Range cell selector button and select the range of cells

you selected for the Insert In range of the map component from the imported spreadsheet.This ensures that the column chart component displays the data of the state that is selected on the map component.

10. Configure the column chart component.For information on configuring chart components, see “Using chart components” on page 42.

Using the art and background componentsArt and backgrounds can be used to enhance your visualizations. The background components can be used to import images or Flash movies into your Xcelsius visualization. Art and background components can be used to customize visualizations:• Image Component

The image component can be used to display JPG images, which lets you add your own logos or artwork into an Xcelsius visualization. You can also add videos, animations, and other interactive elements by importing a Flash movie.

• EllipseAn ellipse that you can add to your visualizations.

• BackgroundBackgrounds are prebuilt artwork that you can add to your visualizations to assist layout and improve design. Backgrounds can be used to create divisions and designate groups of related components. Backgrounds maintain their effects and visual integrity at virtually any size.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 59

Page 60: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the art and background components3

• LineA vertical or horizontal line you can use to define your visualizations.

• RectangleA rectangle that you can add to your visualizations to outline, define, or contain sections.

SkinsEach skin has a number of different backgrounds that you can use that maintains the look and feel of that particular skin. Combined with the appearance options of the backgrounds, you can create a multitude of different looks using the background components. With Skins you can globally change the appearance of components.To select skins, on the View menu, click Change Skin. The following options appear on the Skins dialog box:• Select Skins

Select the skin name from the list.• Reset to Skin Defaults

Select this option to revert any changes you have made to components to the default values for the selected skin. Clear this option to retain the changes you have made to the components.

How to use the image componentUse the image component to display JPG images. This lets you to add your own logos or artwork to an Xcelsius visualization. Note: Progressive JPGs and JPGs with CMYK coloring, as opposed to the standard RGB coloring, are not supported. You can also add videos, animations, and other interactive elements by importing a Flash movie. As exported Xcelsius visualizations are Flash movies, you can use this feature to add an exported Xcelsius visualization into another Xcelsius visualization. Note: Flash Player versions 7 or greater have new security features which may prevent your Xcelsius visualization from connecting with an external data source. Without a policy file, SWF files from one domain cannot access data on another domain or sub-domain. In addition, SWF files served over HTTP cannot access data at a HTTPS location. Please refer to the online article from Macromedia regarding security restrictions for data loading for information on creating a policy file to allow access to data in the cases above.

60 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 61: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the art and background components 3

Embedding external filesWhen importing external files into the image components, you will have the choice of embedding the file. If you choose to embed the file, it will become a part of the SWF file that is created when the visualization is exported. If you choose not to embed the file, at runtime the file will be loaded into the exported visualization as needed. When the visualization is exported, all of the non-embedded external files used in the visualization are written out to a folder with the same name and location as the exported visualization. The visualization will load the external images or movies from this directory. The visualization and folder must exist in the same directory for the external files to be loaded correctly. The decision to embed the file will depend on your specific needs. The main advantages for embedding files are as follows: • Embedded files let you distribute your entire visualization in a single file. • Dynamic Visibility is faster as reloading is not necessary.• Embedded files maintain their state when hidden with Dynamic Visibility. The main advantages for not embedding files as follows: • Possible runtime performance increases since the external files are

unloaded when they are hidden with Dynamic Visibility. • Shorter load times for the application since external files are loaded only

when necessary. • The visualization does not need to be re-exported if external file changes. Regardless of which option you choose, Xcelsius stores a local copy of the file internally in the XLF file. The original file is no longer accessed or used in the visualization. The XLF file can be moved or emailed and the contents of the file will travel with it. In certain cases, you may not want to use local copies of images, but rather load an image from a specified URL at runtime.

Nested external filesXcelsius lets you use external SWF files in your visualizations. These SWF files may, in turn, have external assets such as other SWF files, images, or XML files. The external assets used by the SWF that are referenced with relative paths must be available from the location of the host visualization. For example, if you have a SWF file which loads in an external image at images/myImage.gif, and you use this SWF file within your visualization, the SWF file will attempt to load an image at images/myImage.gif from the location of the visualization. It does not load relative to the external SWF file. You can, for example, add your corporate logo into your Xcelsius visualization.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 61

Page 62: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the collaboration components3

To create an Xcelsius visualization with an image component1. Place an image component on the canvas.2. Double-click the image component to open the Properties panel.3. Click Import.4. Navigate to and select the JPG or SWF file.5. Click Open.Your logo is imported into the visualization at the default size. You can now place and resize the image.

Using the collaboration componentsThis section contains components that can be used in conjunction with a Flash Communication Server to facilitate collaboration between multiple users. See “Using collaboration components” on page 100 for information on configuring your visualizations to work with the collaboration components. • Connection Light

A connection light displays the current status of the connection to the collaborative features of the visualization.

• LoginThis component lets users connect to the collaborative features of the visualization by logging in with a combination of a username and password.

• People ListThe people list displays all of the users that are currently connected to collaborative features of the Xcelsius visualization.

• Remote Scenario ButtonsRemote scenario buttons let users save states of an Xcelsius visualization to a remote server. These states or scenarios can be loaded even when the visualization is closed. The scenarios are saved to a remote server allowing the scenarios to be shared with authorized users across the globe.

Using the other componentsThis category contains an assorted set of components that you can use to enhance your visualizations:• Trend Icon

62 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 63: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the other components 3

The trend icon changes its pointing direction, depending on the value of the cell to which it is linked: • If the value is positive, the arrow points up.• If the value is zero, the arrow is neutral.• If the value is negative, the arrow points down.

• Interactive CalendarThe interactive calendar component is a selector that lets you incorporate date selection into your visualizations.

• Local Scenario ButtonsLets users save states of an Xcelsius visualization to their local machines. Afterwards, these states or scenarios can be loaded quickly, even after closing the visualization. These scenarios are saved to the local machine, and will be unavailable if the visualization is opened on a different machine.

• GridA dynamic table that represents a group of rows and columns to display the content. The Grid lets you show the data just as it is on any table, or preform data modification that can impact other components.

• FS Command ButtonCrystal Xcelsius 4.5 now supports FSCommand. The FSCommand Button enables you to pass values from your Crystal Xcelsius Visualization back to the Crystal Xcelsius. For detailed information about this command, see the Macromedia Flash support site at http://www.macromedia.com/support/flash/action_scripts/actionscript_dictionary/actionscript_dictionary372.html.

• Panel SetThe Panel Set component is a series of framing options that enables you to easily navigate between files in a presentation. You can embed Jpegs or SWF files into the frames of the Panel Set component and adjust a variety of formatting features to customize the look of the component in your visualization.

Sample visualization: interactive calendar componentThe interactive calendar component is a selector that lets you incorporate date selection into your visualizations. The interactive calendar component lets you browse by year, month, and day. The interactive calendar has two date selection modes. The open-ended mode lets you scroll through any year

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 63

Page 64: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the other components3

and month. You can also limit the range of dates that the user can scroll through by setting a minimum and maximum value for the year and month. The interactive calendar has two Insert Options: Date and Day. The Date function inserts the selected date into a cell. The value that is inserted is formatted in the Excel universal date format. The Day function inserts the numeric value for the selected date.You can, for example create a visualization that shows different branches and the daily sales for a given month. You want to display the daily sales data for all the branches in a chart. The interactive calendar component uses the Insert Data function to insert a date value into a cell that is used by VLookup functions to populate a range of data for the chart. With each date selection, the range that the chart is linked to will change to show the branch sales data for the selected date.Note: You can find the spreadsheet, sample XLF file, and sample SWF file for this visualization in the following location:C:\Program Files\Business Objects\Crystal Xcelsius Designer

4.5\samples\User Guide Samples

To create an Xcelsius visualization with an interactive calendar component and a chart component1. Import the Excel spreadsheet into Xcelsius.

For information on importing spreadsheets into Xcelsius, see “Using the Import Model button” on page 25.

2. Place an interactive calendar component at the top of the canvas.3. Place a bar chart component on the canvas below the interactive

calendar component.4. Double-click the interactive calendar component to open the Properties

panel.5. Click the Insert In cell selector button and select an empty cell from the

imported spreadsheet.The Insert In cell must be empty or the functionality of the interactive calendar component will be compromised.When a date is selected, the value is inserted into the cell linked to the Chart Subtitle field. The VLookup functions in the chart component data cells uses this date to find the corresponding data in the Daily Sales by Branch table.

6. On the Behavior tab, set the default. date for the interactive calendar component.Note: You can set the default date by typing in the Default Month, Default Year, and Default Day boxes, or clicking on the adjacent cell selector buttons and selecting the dates from the imported spreadsheet.

64 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 65: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the other components 3

7. Set the date range for the interactive calendar component.Note: You can set the date range by typing in the Start Month, Start Year, End Month, and End Year boxes, or by clicking the adjacent cell selector buttons and selecting the dates from the imported spreadsheet.

8. Close the Properties panel.9. Double-click the bar chart component to open the Properties panel.10. Click the Data Range cell selector button and select the source data from

the imported spreadsheet.11. Type in the Chart Title box or click the adjacent cell selector button and

select the title from the imported spreadsheet.12. Type in the Chart Subtitle box or click the adjacent cell selector button

and select the subtitle from the imported spreadsheet.13. Click Preview.

As you click on the dates in the Interactive Calendar component, the chart component will display the daily sales data for all of the branches for that date.

Local scenario buttons componentThe local scenario buttons component lets users save the current state of a visualization, making it well-suited for saving results of what-if analyses. Users can save any number of these results or scenarios and load them at any time, even after closing the visualization. The scenarios created are specific to each visualization. As such, two visualizations can have scenarios with the same names without interfering with one another. The visualization can be moved or renamed on the same computer and will still be able to access its saved scenarios. Scenarios saved in preview mode will not persist outside of the preview session. This includes snapshots and exporting to PowerPoint or to Outlook.Note: Local scenarios created on one computer will not be accessible to the visualization if it has been emailed or moved to another computer.

How does the local scenario buttons component work?To enable users to save, load, and delete scenarios, add a local scenario button component to the visualization.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 65

Page 66: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the other components3

When running the visualization, users click the local scenario button component for the options for the scenarios: Save, Load, and Delete. After one of the three options is chosen, a dialog box appears, allowing the user to complete the operation.

Flash Player settingsAn unlimited number of scenarios can be saved in every visualization, so long as enough local storage is allocated for the Flash Player. If a user attempts to save a scenario and there is not enough local storage, the Flash Player will prompt the user to allocate more. If more space is allocated, the scenario will be saved successfully. If not, the scenario will not be saved.If a user attempts to save a scenario and local storage has been disabled, the local scenario buttons component will ask the user to enable local storage and automatically open the Flash Player settings. The scenario will not be saved until the user enables local storage and then saves the scenario.The Flash Player settings can be opened by right-clicking anywhere on the visualization. Note: Setting the Local Storage amount of the Flash Player below what is currently used, or disabling local storage by checking the Never box will erase all saved scenarios on the computer. This includes scenarios created in other visualizations. The Flash Player will warn the user before allowing the scenarios to be erased. Loading a saved scenario should restore the visualization to almost the same state it was in when it was saved. There are a few exceptions, primarily cosmetic changes, which don't directly affect the data visualization. The states of external SWF files are also not restored when a scenario is loaded.

Sample visualization: grid componentIn some visualizations, you might want to complement the graphical display of data with traditional tables that show the underlying data. One way to do this is by using a Value component. For instances where you would need multiple value components, you can also use the grid component. The grid component is a collection of N number of value components that are linked together so that they respond to global functions. For example, if you change the font size, the same font size will be applied to all cells or values in the grid component. The grid component works in the same way as the value component. For information on value components, see “Using the Selector components” on page 48.

66 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 67: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the text components 3

The grid component can be used as an input or output component. You can modify the underlying data by placing the pointer over each one of the array values in the grid. You can, for example complement a visualization displaying the Sales by Branch for a company by placing a grid component that displays the data that underlies the chart component.Note: You can find the spreadsheet, sample XLF file, and sample SWF file for this visualization in the following location:C:\Program Files\Business Objects\Crystal Xcelsius Designer

4.5\samples\User Guide Samples

To add a grid component to an Xcelsius visualization1. Place a grid component on the canvas.2. Double-click the grid component to open the Properties panel.3. Click the Link to Cell cell selector button and select the Insert In row of

the visualization and the row containing the x axis values of the chart component.For this example, the range of cells should contain the year names.

A visualization with a chart component and a grid component shows users both the graphical and punctual data representations. As the user selects each branch, both the chart and the grid display the corresponding data.

Using the text componentsThis category contains a set of components for labeling components and entering text in your visualization. The values displayed in the text components are static and will not change as the visualization is updated.Text components let you customize your visualization:• Input Text

The input text component lets users input values into the visualization by typing.

• Input Text AreaThe input text area, similar to the input text component, lets users input text into the visualization. The input text area, however, lets users type multiple lines of text.

• LabelThe label component lets you add an unlimited amount of text to enhance your visualizations. You can use the label component to create titles, subtitles, explanations, help, and more.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 67

Page 68: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the Web connectivity components3

Note: The link between the label component and the imported spreadsheet is dynamic. For information on dynamic and static data sources, see “Dynamic and static data sources” on page 30.

Using the Web connectivity componentsThis category contains a group of components that provides options for linking your visualizations to the Web:• External Slideshow

An External Slide Show component creates a slide show of URL-based images and SWF files.Unlike the normal Image Component, which requires that you first Import the file, the External Slide Show component loads the image at the URL specified in the URL data source.Note:

• When an image is imported into normal Image Components, Xcelsius stores its own local copy of the file internally in the XLF file. The original file is no longer accessed or used in the visualization. Because the file data is stored within the XLF, the XLF can be moved or emailed and the contents of the file travels with it. The External Slide Show points to a URL, however, which can change at runtime. This means that the image does not travel with the XLF. Therefore the image must be available to the SWF at runtime.

• Whenever the External Slide Show URL changes, it attempts to load in the image at that location. Once it has loaded the image, it will transition from the current image to the new one specified at the URL data source.

• URL Link ButtonA button that links to a relative or absolute URL when pressed.

• Web Service ConnectorThe web service connector allows an Xcelsius-created Flash document to communicate to a SOAP-based web service using point and click commands.

• XML Data ButtonThe XML data button lets users refresh visualization data from an external source. Live visualization data can also be translated and sent to an external source using the XML Data Buttons.

68 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 69: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the Web connectivity components 3

• XML Map RefreshThe XML map refresh button lets users manually refresh visualization data that was mapped using the XML mapping functionality of Excel 2003.

• LiveOffice ConnectorThe LiveOffice connector is a web connectivity component that enables you to create Crystal Xcelsius XLF (design files) and SWF (Macromedia Flash files) using Excel spreadsheets constructed from managed Crystal reports or Web Intelligence data.

Sample visualization: Web Service Connector componentThe web service connector component can be used to create a visualization that retrieves data from a SOAP-based web service. You can, for example create a visualization that lets the user retrieve stock quotes for a given company. You can use the web service connector component to create a visualization that connects to a SOAP-based web service and retrieves the current stock price for the selected stock. Note: You can find the spreadsheet, sample XLF file, and sample SWF file for this visualization in the following location:C:\Program Files\Business Objects\Crystal XcelsiusC Designer

4.5\samples\User Guide Samples

To create an Xcelsius visualization with a web service connector component, a value component, and an input text component1. Import the Excel spreadsheet into Xcelsius.

For information on importing spreadsheets into Xcelsius, see “Using the Import Model button” on page 25.For this example, the Excel file should contain the target cells for the current ticker symbol and the quote for the company.

2. Place an input text component on the canvas.3. Place a value component on the canvas beneath the input text component.4. Place a web service connector component on the canvas above the input

text component.5. Double-click the input text component to open the Properties panel.6. Click the Insert In cell selector button and select the Ticker Symbol cell

from the imported spreadsheet.7. Close the Properties panel.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 69

Page 70: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the Web connectivity components3

8. Double-click the value component to open the Properties panel.9. Click the Link to Cell cell selector button and select the Quote cell from

the imported spreadsheet.10. Close the Properties panel.11. Double-click the web service connector component to open the

Properties panel.12. Click Select Web Service.

The Select Web Service dialog box appears.13. In the WSDL URL box, type the URL to the WSDL that describes the

service.For this example, type the following URL: http://www.xcelsius.com/WebServiceConnectorSample/xquotesproxy.wsdl.

14. Click Submit.Xcelsius queries the WSDL and returns a list of available methods in the Methods list.

15. On the Methods list, click a method, and click OK.For this example, select the GetQuote method.

16. In the Input Values box, navigate to the input value.For this example, click Symbol.

17. Click the Input Values cell selector button to map the input value to the imported spreadsheet.For this example, select the Ticker Symbol cell you specified for the input text component.Note: Only elements can be tied to the component as Input Values

18. In the Return Values box, navigate to the return value.For this example, select Last.

19. Click the Return Values cell selector button to map the return value to the imported spreadsheet.For this example, select the Quote cell you specified for the value component.Note: • Elements and folders can be tied to the component as Return Values.• The schema portion of the WSDL is loaded into a validating parser. That

means if the schema portion is not fully conforming, then an error will occur. The WSDL will need to be fixed before it can be used in Xcelsius.

70 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 71: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the Web connectivity components 3

• If the schema portion of the WSDL has choice elements, only the first choice will be available to be used in the Web Service Connector Component.

• If there are dependencies on other schema files, make sure you use an import tag with a "schemaLocation" attribute that the application can get to.

• DIME and other binary formats are not supported.• Overloaded method names, methods with the same name but

different types, are not supported. SOAP headers are not supported.

20. Click Preview.Enter a stock ticker symbol in the Input Text component and click the Web Service Connector component to get the current stock price

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 71

Page 72: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Crystal Xcelsius ComponentsUsing the Web connectivity components3

72 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 73: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Using Advanced Features

chapter

Page 74: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesOverview4

Overview

This chapter provides an introduction to the functionality that can be used to customize Crystal Xcelsius visualizations.

Dynamic Visibility functionalityFor information on the specific dynamic visibility options, see “Dynamic Visibility” on page 157.You can combine two components with dynamic visibility. For example, you can add a Toggle Button to display a specific chart. The Toggle Button can be configured to toggle between inserting showChart and hideChart into a cell when it is selected. By linking the chart to this destination cell and setting the Chart's Display Status Key to showChart, the Chart becomes visible when the Toggle Button inserts the value showChart and hidden when the Toggle Button inserts hideChart. You may want to switch between a number of components. To accomplish this, use the Display Status Key and a Selector. For example, a visualization might need to toggle between different charts. To achieve this, give each chart a unique Display Status Key, such as chart1 or chart2. A list box with Source Data that matches the Display Status Keys can then insert into a cell the Display Status of every chart that is linked to the list box. As the list box value is inserted into the cell, the corresponding chart is made visible, while the others are hidden.

Sample visualization: Dynamic Visibility To create an Xcelsius visualization using dynamic visibility with a check

box component and a chart component1. Import the Excel spreadsheet into Xcelsius.

For information on importing spreadsheets into Xcelsius, see “Using the Import Model button” on page 25.

2. Place a check box component at the top of the canvas.3. Place a column chart component on the canvas beneath the check box

component.4. Double-click the check box component to open the Properties panel.5. Click the Source Data Browse button and set the values to control

whether the check box component is checked, and click OK.For this example, you can use the default values of 0 and 1.

74 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 75: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesDynamic Visibility functionality 4

6. Click the Insert In cell selector button and select an empty cell from the imported spreadsheet.The cell must be empty for the dynamic visibility functionality to work.

7. Close the Properties panel.8. Double-click the column chart component to open the Properties panel.9. Configure the column chart component.

For information on configuring chart components, see “Using chart components” on page 42.

10. On the Behavior tab, click the Display Status cell selector button and select the Insert In cell you specified for the check box component.

By default, when you run the visualization, the chart won't be visible. Users must click on the Check Box to enable the chart.

Sample visualization: Status List and Display StatusFor information on the Status List option on the Insert Option list, see “Insert Data” on page 210.For information on Display Status functionality, see “Dynamic Visibility” on page 157.You can, for example create a visualization that shows the revenues by region that has different charts displaying the data for each region.

To create an Xcelsius visualization using dynamic visibility with a radio button component and multiple chart components1. Import the Excel spreadsheet into Xcelsius.

For information on importing spreadsheets into Xcelsius, see “Using the Import Model button” on page 25.

2. Place a radio button component on the left side of the canvas.3. Double-click the radio button component to open the Properties panel.4. Click the Labels cell selector button and select the cells containing the

radio button selections from the imported spreadsheet.For this example, the range of cells should contain the region names.

5. On the Insert Option list, click Status List.6. Click the Insert In cell selector button and select an empty range of cells.

The range of cells must correspond to the range of selections. For this example, the range of cells must correspond to the region names.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 75

Page 76: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesDynamic Visibility functionality4

7. Close the Properties panel.8. Place a pie chart component beside the radio button component on the

canvas.9. Configure the pie chart component to display the data for the North

America region.For information on configuring chart components, see “Using chart components” on page 42.

10. Place a line chart component beside the radio button component on the canvas.

11. Configure the line chart component to display the data for the Latin America region.

12. Place a column chart component beside the radio button component on the canvas.

13. Configure the column chart component to display the data for the Europe region.

14. Place a bar chart component beside the radio button component on the canvas.

15. Configure the bar chart component to display the data for the Asia region.16. Place a pie chart component beside the radio button component on the

canvas.17. Configure the pie chart component to display the data for the Australia

and Pacific region.18. Open the Properties panel of the North America pie chart component.19. On the Behavior tab, click the Display Status cell selector button and

select the Status List cell for North America you specified for the radio button component.

20. Close the Properties panel.21. Repeat steps 18-20 for the other region charts.22. Click Preview.

When a selection is made on the radio button component the number 1 is inserted in the Status List cell corresponding to the selection, all other Status List cells display the value zero. When a Display Status cell has the value 1 in it, all components linked to that cell are visible, the result is that you will see only the chart that corresponds to the radio button selection is displayed.

Each region selected on the Radio Button will show a different type of chart.

76 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 77: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesIgnore End Blanks for variable length ranges 4

Ignore End Blanks for variable length rangesFor information on the Ignore End Blanks options for chart components, see “Range Options” on page 174.For information on the Ignore End Blanks options for selector components, see “Range Options” on page 219.

Sample visualization: Ignore End BlanksChart components have the ability to Ignore End Blanks. Both end blanks in the Series and end blanks in the Values can be ignored independently. You can, for example create a visualization showing the daily sales figures for each month of the year.

To create an Xcelsius visualization using ignore end blanks with a combo box component and a chart component1. Import the Excel spreadsheet into Xcelsius.

For information on importing spreadsheets, see “Using the Import Model button” on page 25.

2. Place a combo box component at the top of the canvas.3. Place a column chart component beneath the combo box component on

the canvas.4. Double-click the combo box component to open the Properties panel.5. Click the Labels cell selector button and select the cells containing the

selections you want displayed in the combo box component from the imported spreadsheet.For this example, the range of cells should contain the months of the year.

6. On the Insert Option list, click Rows.7. Click the Source Data cell selector button and select the cells containing

the data connected to the selections made in the combo box component.For this example, the range of cells should include the daily data for the months of the year.

8. Click the Insert In cell selector button and select an empty range of cells.The range of cells must be empty so that the data corresponding to the selections made in the combo box component can be inserted into the range of cells. The range of cells must correspond in size to the range of data that could be inserted into the range of cells.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 77

Page 78: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesAlerts4

9. Close the Properties panel.10. Double-click the column chart component to open the Properties panel.11. Click the Data Range cell selector button and select the data to be

displayed on the column chart component.12. On the Behavior tab, click Values: Ignore End Blanks.13. Close the Properties panel.14. Click Preview.The chart displays the same number of sales figures as the number of days in the selected month. One chart displays both varying data and varying amounts of data.

AlertsFor information on the specific Alerts options, see “Common Alerts Tab features” on page 163.

Sample visualization: single value using alertsYou can, for example create a visualization that shows the actual balances compared to the target for month to date Revenues, Inventory, and the Cost of Good Sold.

To create an Xcelsius visualization using alerts with gauge components1. Import the Excel spreadsheet into Xcelsius.

For information on importing spreadsheets, see “Using the Import Model button” on page 25.

2. Place a gauge component on the right of the canvas.3. Double-click the gauge component to open the Properties panel.4. Click the Title cell selector button and select the cell containing the title

for the gauge component.For this example, the title for the gauge component is Sales.

5. Click the Link to Cell cell selector button and select the cell containing the Actual Value for Sales from the imported spreadsheet.

6. On the Alerts tab, click Enable Alerts.7. Click Percent Alerts.

78 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 79: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the Use Web Service Option 4

8. Click an Alert Definition.For this example, click High Values are Good.

9. Customize the percentage limits.10. Customize the alert colors.11. Click the Target cell selector button and select the Target value for Sales

from the imported spreadsheet.12. Click Enable Object Alerts.

This option changes the gauge pointer color to reflect the alert level of the pointer position.

13. Click Enable Alert Level Display.This option adds the alert color spectrum to the gauge component.

14. On the Behavior tab, adjust the initial limits for the gauge component as needed.For this example, set the upper limit to 500, and the lower limit to 99.

15. Close the Properties panel.16. Copy the gauge component and paste two copies beside the original on

the canvas.17. Double-click the second gauge component to open the Properties panel.18. Customize the gauge component to display Inventory data.

Set the Alert Definition to Middle Values are Good.19. Close the Properties panel.20. Double-click the third gauge component to open the Properties panel.21. Customize the gauge component to display the Cost of Good Sold data.

Set the Alert Definition to Low Values are Good.22. Close the Properties panel.23. Click Preview.

Using the Use Web Service OptionWith the Use Web Service option, you can create SWF files that periodically and automatically refresh data via an XML data source. Using this option is a two-step process. The first step is to configure and export a SWF file that will pull in data from an XML data source. The second step is to develop the XML source that the SWF file is going to access to retrieve the remote data. This

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 79

Page 80: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the Use Web Service Option4

XML source can be a local XML file, or a script running on a web server that returns XML data. The only requirement is that the XML data be in the correct format for the SWF file to read.When you select the Use Web Service option, there is an option to generate a sample XML file that contains the XML structure that the SWF file needs to properly refresh the data. If you would like to pull in data from a database or an existing web service, you must develop the server-side code that will gather data from the data source and output the XML data.Note: • This option was called Use Dynamic Web Query in previous versions of

Xcelsius.• The Use Web Service option will refresh all non-formula Static Data

Sources when the visualization loads. The Use Web Service option will only update Static Data Sources at runtime for a subset of components.For more information on static and dynamic data sources, see “Dynamic and static data sources” on page 30.

• Flash Player versions 7 or greater have new security features which may prevent your Xcelsius visualization from connecting with an external data source. Without a policy file, SWF files from one domain cannot access data on another domain or sub-domain. SWF files served over HTTP cannot access data at an HTTPS location. For more information, see the online article from Macromedia regarding security restrictions, available at http://www.macromedia.com/devnet/flash/articles/fplayer_security.html.

Sample visualization: Web Service OptionYou can, for example create a visualization that lists stock market data for several companies pulled from an XML source. Note: This example uses a local XML file as the data source. This same visualization could be configured to pull in data from a remote XML data source.

To replace the data selection1. Configure an Xcelsius visualization to display stock prices.2. On the Data menu, click Replace Data Selection.

The Replace Data Selection dialog box appears.This function lets you select the cells that you want Xcelsius to modify each time the visualization is updated with the XML data.

80 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 81: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the Use Web Service Option 4

3. Click Add.A new range is added.

4. Type a name for the range in the Range Name box.5. Click the Range Selection cell selector button and select the range of

cells to be updated from the imported spreadsheet, and click OK.For this example, the range of cells should contain the stock data.

To export the visualization 1. On the File menu, click Export Settings.

The Export Settings dialog box appears.2. Click Use Web Service.3. In the URL box, type the URL of the web service that will return the XML

data.For this example, type “stocks.xml”.Note: • If you specify a relative URL, the SWF file that is exported will only

refresh data if the file or script that was entered in the URL box is in the same directory as the SWF file.

• If you specify an absolute URL make sure to include “http://” at the beginning of the URL.

4. Click Generate Sample Query Result.When this option is selected, an XML file is generated that has the same name as the SWF file that is exported and contains the default value of the replace data ranges. This sample file can be used as the data source for your visualization, or it can be used as a template by your web developer to ensure that the XML data that is returned from your web service is formatted correctly.

5. Click Refresh Dynamic Data Sources.The default behavior for the Use Web Service option is for the SWF file to query the specified web service when the SWF file is loaded into the browser. The Refresh Dynamic Data Sources option queries the web service when the SWF file loads and continues to query the service every n number of seconds.

6. Click OK.7. On the File menu, point to Export, and click Macromedia Flash (SWF).

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 81

Page 82: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the Use Web Service Option4

8. Enter a name for the SWF file, and click Save.For this example, enter the name Stocks.swf.

9. Open Stocks.swf in a web browser.10. Modify Stocks.xml.

The changes are reflected in Stocks.swf.Note: • If the changes are not reflected and you are using Internet Explorer,

see “Internet Explorer caching issues” on page 82.• When constructing the XML file or the script that will provide XML

data to the flash file, be aware that white space that appears inside node elements is significant. Make sure that your code does not insert unintended leading or trailing white space inside node elements.

Internet Explorer caching issuesThe default behavior of Internet Explorer is to check for new versions of files only when Internet Explorer starts. This prevents Xcelsius visualizations that have been configured with the Use Web Service option to “Refresh Every N Seconds” from refreshing properly. Note: The behavior and the solutions described in this section apply only to the Internet Explorer web browser.

Server solution You can configure your server side scripts to tell the Internet Explorer client that the cache has expired. This will cause Internet Explorer to pull the latest data from the server. This solution will work for all viewers of your Xcelsius content regardless of their Internet Explorer settings.This can be accomplished in a ASP.NET script by including the following line in your script:Response.Cache.SetExpires(DateTime.Now);

This can be accomplished in a JAVA script by including the following lines in your script:response.setHeader("Cache-Control","no-cache"); //HTTP 1.1

response.setHeader("Pragma","no-cache"); //HTTP 1.0 response.setDateHeader ("Expires", 0); //prevents caching at the proxy server

82 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 83: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the Use Web Service Option 4

Client solution You change the client settings so that Internet Explorer checks for newer versions of files on every visit to the page, Xcelsius visualizations that have been configured to use the “Refresh Every N Seconds” option will then display properly. This solution requires you to make a change to all client machines that will be viewing your Xcelsius content.

To resolve Internet Explorer caching issues with a client solution1. Launch Internet Explorer.2. On the Tools menu, click Internet Options.

The Internet Options dialog box appears.3. On the General tab, click Settings.

The Settings dialog box appears.4. Click Every visit to the page, and click OK.5. In the Internet Options dialog box, click OK.

Using a script to set the Use Web Service Option URLFor information on the Web Service option, see “Using the Use Web Service Option” on page 79.You can create a visualization that is deployed on a web site and loads in XML data based on parameters that are specified by the host site. For example, you can create a visualization that shows the latest sales data for the sales representative that is currently logged into the web site. In order to implement this type of functionality the web site needs a way to dynamically set the URL that the SWF file is going to query to get the latest XML data.To allow this type of functionality, SWF files that have been generated by Xcelsius expose the URL parameter as well as a method to force the SWF file to query the URL and refresh its content. This lets you have your web site pass a parameterized URL to the SWF file, or even specify a completely different URL based on user interaction with the web site. For example, the URL that the SWF file is querying may be a script that accepts arguments like the following sample address: www.hostsite.com/monthlysales.aspx?userid=someuser. If Bob Jones is logged into the host web site the site can programmatically build the URL string with Bob Jones' information: www.hostsite.com/monthlysales.aspx?userid=bobjones. Then the site can set the URL parameter for the SWF file and call the refresh method to force the SWF file to query the URL to load in the latest sales data for Bob Jones.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 83

Page 84: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the Use Web Service Option4

Example

You can use Java Script to set the Use Web Service option URL and force the SWF file to reload the XML data. Note: This sample uses a SWF file that is embedded in a HTML page using an instance of the Macromedia Shockwave ActiveX control. The following code is the source of the jstoswf.html file:<HTML>

<HEAD><TITLE>JavaScript to SWF Sample</TITLE></HEAD><script language="javascript"><!--function update (){// Set the URL where data should be retrieved from and trigger an updatedocument.myMovieName.SetVariable("_xmlUrl",document.frm_main.url.value);document.myMovieName.TCallLabel("/","LoadXML");}// --></script>

<BODY><form name="frm_main"><h4>Example: Triggering an XML Data Update from Javascript (with parameterized URL)</h4><br><input type="button" value="Update XML" name="update_xml" onclick="update()"><input type="text" name="url" value="jstoswffromhtml.xml">

</form><OBJECT classid="clsid:D27CDB6E-AE6D-11cf-96B8-444553540000"codebase="http://download.macromedia.com/pub/shockwave/cabs/flash/swflash.cab#version=6,0,40,0"WIDTH="158" HEIGHT="157" id="myMovieName"><PARAM NAME=movie VALUE="jstoswf.swf"> <PARAM NAME=quality VALUE=high><PARAM NAME=bgcolor VALUE=#FFFFFF><PARAM NAME=_xmlUrl VALUE="jstoswffromhtml.xml"><EMBED src="test.swf" quality=high bgcolor=#FFFFFF WIDTH="158" HEIGHT="157" NAME="myMovieName" ALIGN="" TYPE="application/x-shockwave-flash" PLUGINSPAGE="http://www.macromedia.com/go/

84 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 85: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing Flash Variables to update a visualization 4

getflashplayer"></EMBED></OBJECT></BODY></HTML>

JavaScript detailsThe sample JavaScript code in the “update” function changes the URL that was set using the Use Web Service option and triggers a reload of the data. The URL is set from the “update” function by the following code:document.myMovieName.SetVariable("_xmlUrl","http://

sampleurl.aspx");• document.myMovieName refers to the SWF instance running in the

HTML page• Argument 1 – specifies the variable name to set and MUST be the

string "_xmlUrl"• Argument 2 – is the new URL valueThe data reload is triggered from the “update” function by the following code: document.myMovieName.TCallLabel("/","LoadXML");• document.myMovieName refers to the SWF instance running in the

HTML page• Argument 1 – specifies the root timeline of the SWF file and MUST be

the string "/"• Argument 2 – specifies the function to be called and MUST be the string

"LoadXML"

Using Flash Variables to update a visualizationWith the Use Flash Variables option, you can pass data directly to a SWF file that is hosted in a HTML page. This data is passed to the visualization before the SWF file loads and lets you initialize your visualization with any data that is passed in by this method.Note: This functionality utilizes the FlashVars property of the Macromedia Flash Player. For more information on this functionality please see the Using FlashVars to pass variables to a SWF TechNote on the Macromedia web site.You can, for example create a visualization that lists stock market data for several companies and displays the latest stock data when the SWF file is viewed in a web page.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 85

Page 86: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing Flash Variables to update a visualization4

Step 1: To configure the visualization1. Create an Xcelsius visualization to display stock data.2. On the File menu, click Export Settings.

The Export Settings dialog box appears.You can configure the format of the data that will be passed to the SWF file as well as the cells that will be updated.

3. Click Use Flash Variables.This ensures that the SWF file that is exported is configured to received data via the FlashVars property of the Macromedia Flash Player.

4. Click Generate Sample Code.This option generates an HTML page that contains sample code that passes data to the exported SWF file in the data format that was selected.

5. Click CSV format.CSV Format passes comma separated data to the SWF file.Note: You can select XML Format to pass XML formatted data to the SWF file.

6. Click Define Variables.The Replace Data Selection dialog box appears.

7. Click Add.A new range is created.

8. In the Name box, type a name for the range.For this example, type “StockData”.

9. Click the Variable Selection cell selector button and select the range of cells to be replaced from the imported spreadsheet.For this example, the range of cells should contain the stock data.

10. In the Replace Data Selection dialog box, click OK.11. In the Export Settings dialog box, click OK.

Step 2: To export the visualization1. On the File menu, point to Export, and click Macromedia Flash (SWF).2. Enter a name for the SWF file, and click Save.

For this example, enter “Stocks.swf”.Because Generate Sample Code was selected, a file named “Stocks.html” is generated in the same location.

86 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 87: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the XML Data Button component 4

3. Open Stocks.swf in a web browser.4. Open Stocks.html.5. Find the specified line of code:

• Internet Explorer<PARAM NAME=FlashVars

VALUE="StockData=Widget%20Maker%20Inc.%2C33.500000...

• Netscape/Mozilla<EMBED src="Stocks.swf" quality=high bgcolor=#FFFFFF

WIDTH="452" HEIGHT="355" FlashVars="StockData=Widget%20Maker%20Inc.%2C33.500000...

6. Change the first value, 33.500000, to 99.500000.7. Save Stocks.html.8. Reload or refresh Stocks.html in the web browser.

The changes are reflected in Stocks.swf.

Using the XML Data Button componentWith the XML Data Button component, you can refresh visualization data from an external source through HTTP. The component is similar to the Use Web Service option. For information on the Use Web Service option, see “Using the Use Web Service Option” on page 79. The component can be used to send live visualization data to an external source; for example, form submission and data collection. The data can be refreshed and sent periodically and automatically or on demand with the push of a button. Note: • For information on caching issues when viewing Xcelsius content in

Internet Explorer, see “Internet Explorer caching issues” on page 82.• Flash Player versions 7 or greater have new security features which may

prevent your Xcelsius visualization from connecting with an external data source. Without a policy file, SWF files from one domain cannot access data on another domain or sub-domain. SWF files served over HTTP cannot access data at an HTTPS location. For more information, see the online article from Macromedia regarding security restrictions, available at http://www.macromedia.com/devnet/flash/articles/fplayer_security.html.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 87

Page 88: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the XML Data Button component4

The XML Data component lets you use send and load functionality simultaneously through one URL. The send ranges are sent to the URL prior to retrieving the load data. This lets you create scripts which examine the sent data and return data that corresponds to the values sent —much like a web request. For example, if a date was sent to a server script, the script could return the sales figures for that date. Excel ranges are mapped to XML using a row-column structure. For example, a one-row, three-column range named “ExampleRange” would be represented in XML with: <variable name="ExampleRange">

<row><column> Row1 Column1 value </column><column> Row1 Column2 value </column><column> Row1 Column3 value </column></row></variable>

where “Row1 Column1 value” would be the actual value of the cell in the first row and first column of the range, and so on. The entire group of ranges is encapsulated within <data> tags. During a load, XML is translated into Excel ranges using the reverse process.

Sample visualization: XML Data Button componentA polling application utilizes both send and load functionality. Votes must be sent to the server to be tallied and total results must be loaded from the server. There are five parts to such a procedure:• “Part 1: To configure the XML Data Button component” on page 89

Specify the server script that will communicate with the component.• “Part 2: To send the data selection” on page 89

Select the cells that will be sent to the server at run time.• “Part 3: (Server-side) To receive data from the XML Data Button

component” on page 90 Develop the web script to receive and tally votes.

• “Part 4: To load the data selection” on page 94 Select the cells that will be updated at run time from the server.

• “Part 5: (Server-Side) To send data to the XML Data Button component” on page 94

88 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 89: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the XML Data Button component 4

Part 1: To configure the XML Data Button componentTo create applications that connect to external sources using the XML Data Button component, you must configure the connection and refresh options. Each XML Data component can communicate with a different external source. This source is specified in the URL options on the General tab of the component Properties panel. The URL must be available to the generated SWF application at run-time in order for the data to be sent and loaded correctly. In the polling example, votes need to be tallied and up-to-date results displayed. We can accomplish this by communicating with a server script that interacts directly with a database. An ASP .NET script called addresults.aspx is used, but there are no restrictions on how the server script needs to be implemented.

To configure the XML data button component1. Double-click the XML data button component to open the Properties panel.2. In the URL box, enter the URL where your server script is hosted.

Note: To select the URL from the imported spreadsheet, click the URL cell selector button.

3. On the Behavior tab, ensure that Refresh On Load and Refresh On Interval are not selected.

Part 2: To send the data selectionUsers can vote on four separate categories using a series of sliders. By adding the cells that are tied to the sliders to the list of ranges to send, we can send the vote to the server.

To configure an Xcelsius visualization to send data to an external source1. Create an Xcelsius visualization with an XML Data Button component.2. Double-click the XML Data Button component to open the Properties panel.3. Click Enable Send.4. Click Add.

A new range is created.5. In the Name box, type a name for the range.

For this example, enter the name “vote”.Note: To select a name from the imported spreadsheet click the Name cell selector button.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 89

Page 90: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the XML Data Button component4

6. Click the Range cell selector button and select the range of cells to be sent to the external data source.

7. In the URL box, enter the URL where the data will be sent.Typically, this URL will address a server script. When the button is triggered, the ranges you selected will be translated to XML and sent to the script via HTTP using the POST method. The script can parse the XML and execute appropriate actions, such as adding or modifying database entries based on the translated data. Note: To select the URL from the imported spreadsheet, click the URL cell selector button.

Part 3: (Server-side) To receive data from the XML Data Button componentThe XML Data component sends specified ranges in a row-column structure. You can view the exact structure that will be sent to the server using the Preview XML button in the Send section. The server script should expect this XML structure. The following example was developed to run on a Microsoft .NET web server. There are no restrictions on how the web query needs to be implemented. The server script for the polling application has two functions. It must handle the data sent from the SWF and, return the updated totals for the poll. In order to tally votes, the server-side script must examine the incoming XML data to extract the vote information. Using this information, the script can then record the vote by inserting it into a database. The following files make up the server-side implementation of tallying the votes: • SendPreview.xml.

An XML file generated by Xcelsius with the Preview XML button of the Send section on the General tab of the Properties panel.<data>

<variable name="vote"><row><column>1.0</column><column>1.0</column><column>1.0</column><column>1.0</column></row></variable></data>

• addresults.aspx. A VB script that reads the XML data and adds the parsed vote to the database.

90 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 91: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the XML Data Button component 4

<%@ Page Language="VB" aspcompat=true Debug="true" validateRequest="false" %><%@ Import Namespace="System.Data" %><%@ Import Namespace="System.Data.SqlClient" %>

<%

'Get XML that was send from SWF fileDim sXMLString

dim item as StringFor Each item In Request.Form'Response.Write(item & " = " & Request.Form(item) & VbCrLf)sXMLString = sXMLString & item & " = " & Request.Form(item)Next

'Load XML into objectDim oXML as ObjectDim oNodeList as ObjectDim oNode as Object

oXML = Server.CreateObject("MSXML2.DOMDocument")oXML.async = FalseoXML.validateOnParse = False

'Response.Write(sXMLString)'Response.Write(oXML.loadXML(sXMLString))oXML.loadXML(sXMLString)

'Use XPath to get the datadim sPath as StringsPath = "/data/variable/row/column"oNodeList = oXML.documentElement.selectNodes(sPath)

'Store data in an arraydim i, aVals(3)i=0For Each oNode in oNodeListWith oNode' Just write the xml for that node to show you.'Response.Write(.text + "<br>")aVals(i)=.texti=i+1End WithNext

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 91

Page 92: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the XML Data Button component4

'Insert data into databaseDim sSQL as String ' String variable for building our queryDim oCon as Objectdim oCmd as Objectdim sConnect as String

'Define insert statementsSQL = "INSERT INTO ComdexPoll (Booth, Staff, Demos, Buy) VALUES (" & aVals(0) & ", " & aVals(1) & ", " & aVals(2) & ", " & aVals(3) & ")"

'Create connection objectsConnect = "Provider=SQLOLEDB;Data Source=yourdb;Initial Catalog=yourdb;User Id=user;Password=password;"oCon = Server.CreateObject("ADODB.Connection")oCon.ConnectionString = sConnectoCon.Open

'Create command objectoCmd = Server.CreateObject("ADODB.Command")oCmd.ActiveConnection = oConoCmd.CommandText = sSQL

'Execute the command to insert the dataoCmd.Execute()

'Select new totals from the databasedim oRst as ObjectoRst = Server.CreateObject("ADODB.RecordSet")oRst.ActiveConnection = oConsSql = "select Sum(Booth) as Booth, Sum(Staff) as Staff, Sum(Demos) as Demos, Sum(Buy) as Buy, Count(ID) as TotalRecs from comdexpoll"oRst.Open(sSql)

'Build XML data to returndim sXML as StringsXML = "<data>"

'totalDatasXML = sXML & "<variable name=" + chr(34) + "totalData" + chr(34) + ">"sXML = sXML & "<row>"sXML = sXML & "<column>" & oRst("Booth").value & "</

92 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 93: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the XML Data Button component 4

column>"sXML = sXML & "<column>" & oRst("Staff").value & "</column>"sXML = sXML & "<column>" & oRst("Demos").value & "</column>"sXML = sXML & "<column>" & oRst("Buy").value & "</column>"sXML = sXML & "</row>"sXML = sXML & "</variable>"

'totalEntriessXML = sXML & "<variable name=" + chr(34) + "totalEntries" + chr(34) + ">"sXML = sXML & "<row>"sXML = sXML & "<column>" & oRst("TotalRecs").value & "</column>"sXML = sXML & "</row>"sXML = sXML & "</variable>"

'userDefaultssXML = sXML & "<variable name=" + chr(34) + "userDefaults" + chr(34) + ">"sXML = sXML & "<row>"sXML = sXML & "<column>5</column>"sXML = sXML & "<column>5</column>"sXML = sXML & "<column>5</column>"sXML = sXML & "<column>5</column>"sXML = sXML & "</row>"sXML = sXML & "</variable>"

'close out the XML data stringsXML = sXML & "</data>"

'Now write the data out so that it gets returnedResponse.Write(sXML)

'Cleanup connection varsoRst.closeoRst = NothingoCmd = NothingoCon.closeoCon = Nothing

%>

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 93

Page 94: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the XML Data Button component4

Part 4: To load the data selection

To configure an Xcelsius visualization to refresh data from an external source1. Double-click the XML Data Button component to open the Properties

panel.2. Click Enable Load.3. Click Add.

A new range is created.4. In the Name box, type a name for the range.

For this example, enter the name “totalData”.Note: To select a name from the imported spreadsheet click the Name cell selector button.

5. Click the Range cell selector button and select the range of cells to be refreshed.

6. Repeat steps 3-5 for the “totalEntries” and “userDefaults” ranges.7. In the URL box, enter the URL of the external data source.

This URL can point to any source that returns the properly formatted XML document, such as a static XML document or a server script that returns XML. Note: To select a URL from the imported spreadsheet, click the URL cell selector button.

8. Setup the external data source to return the XML.You can create an XML file and manually update it as needed or write a server script that queries a database and translates the results into XML. Choose an implementation that suits your specific needs.

First configure the XML Data button to enable loading from the external data source.

Part 5: (Server-Side) To send data to the XML Data Button componentThe XML Data component expects to receive XML data in the same row-column format that it uses to send range data. You can view the exact structure that the component is expecting by pressing the Preview XML button in the Load area. The following example was developed to run on a Microsoft .NET web server. There are no restrictions on how the web query needs to be implemented.

94 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 95: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the XML Data Button component 4

The server script for our polling application has two functions. It must handle the data sent from the SWF and return the updated totals for the poll. To refresh the polling application with the latest results, the server-side script queries a database to pull the most up-to-date data. The script then converts the data into the XML structure that the XML Data component is expecting. The XML is sent back to the component where it is converted into data and used to update the visualization. The following files make up the server-side implementation of tallying the votes: • LoadPreview.xml

An XML file generated by Xcelsius with the Preview XML button of the Load area on the General tab of the Properties panel of the component.<data>

<variable name="totalData"><row><column>5</column><column>10</column><column>3</column><column>5</column></row></variable><variable name="totalEntries"><row><column>10.0</column></row></variable><variable name="userDefaults"><row><column>1.0</column><column>1.0</column><column>1.0</column><column>1.0</column></row></variable></data>

• addresults.aspxA VB script that reads the XML data and adds the parsed vote to the database.<%@ Page Language="VB" aspcompat=true Debug="true"

validateRequest="false" %><%@ Import Namespace="System.Data" %><%@ Import Namespace="System.Data.SqlClient" %>

<%

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 95

Page 96: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the XML Data Button component4

'Get XML that was send from SWF fileDim sXMLString

dim item as StringFor Each item In Request.Form'Response.Write(item & " = " & Request.Form(item) & VbCrLf)sXMLString = sXMLString & item & " = " & Request.Form(item)Next

'Load XML into objectDim oXML as ObjectDim oNodeList as ObjectDim oNode as Object

oXML = Server.CreateObject("MSXML2.DOMDocument")oXML.async = FalseoXML.validateOnParse = False

'Response.Write(sXMLString)'Response.Write(oXML.loadXML(sXMLString))oXML.loadXML(sXMLString)

'Use XPath to get the datadim sPath as StringsPath = "/data/variable/row/column"oNodeList = oXML.documentElement.selectNodes(sPath)

'Store data in an arraydim i, aVals(3)i=0For Each oNode in oNodeListWith oNode' Just write the xml for that node to show you.'Response.Write(.text + "<br>")aVals(i)=.texti=i+1End WithNext

'Insert data into databaseDim sSQL as String ' String variable for building our queryDim oCon as Objectdim oCmd as Object

96 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 97: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the XML Data Button component 4

dim sConnect as String

'Define insert statementsSQL = "INSERT INTO ComdexPoll (Booth, Staff, Demos, Buy) VALUES (" & aVals(0) & ", " & aVals(1) & ", " & aVals(2) & ", " & aVals(3) & ")"

'Create connection objectsConnect = "Provider=SQLOLEDB;Data Source=yourdb;Initial Catalog=yourdb;User Id=user;Password=password;"oCon = Server.CreateObject("ADODB.Connection")oCon.ConnectionString = sConnectoCon.Open

'Create command objectoCmd = Server.CreateObject("ADODB.Command")oCmd.ActiveConnection = oConoCmd.CommandText = sSQL

'Execute the command to insert the dataoCmd.Execute()

'Select new totals from the databasedim oRst as ObjectoRst = Server.CreateObject("ADODB.RecordSet")oRst.ActiveConnection = oConsSql = "select Sum(Booth) as Booth, Sum(Staff) as Staff, Sum(Demos) as Demos, Sum(Buy) as Buy, Count(ID) as TotalRecs from comdexpoll"oRst.Open(sSql)

'Build XML data to returndim sXML as StringsXML = "<data>"

'totalDatasXML = sXML & "<variable name=" + chr(34) + "totalData" + chr(34) + ">"sXML = sXML & "<row>"sXML = sXML & "<column>" & oRst("Booth").value & "</column>"sXML = sXML & "<column>" & oRst("Staff").value & "</column>"sXML = sXML & "<column>" & oRst("Demos").value & "</column>"sXML = sXML & "<column>" & oRst("Buy").value & "</

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 97

Page 98: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the XML Data Button component4

column>"sXML = sXML & "</row>"sXML = sXML & "</variable>"

'totalEntriessXML = sXML & "<variable name=" + chr(34) + "totalEntries" + chr(34) + ">"sXML = sXML & "<row>"sXML = sXML & "<column>" & oRst("TotalRecs").value & "</column>"sXML = sXML & "</row>"sXML = sXML & "</variable>"

'userDefaultssXML = sXML & "<variable name=" + chr(34) + "userDefaults" + chr(34) + ">"sXML = sXML & "<row>"sXML = sXML & "<column>5</column>"sXML = sXML & "<column>5</column>"sXML = sXML & "<column>5</column>"sXML = sXML & "<column>5</column>"sXML = sXML & "</row>"sXML = sXML & "</variable>"

'close out the XML data stringsXML = sXML & "</data>"

'Now write the data out so that it gets returnedResponse.Write(sXML)

'Cleanup connection varsoRst.closeoRst = NothingoCmd = NothingoCon.closeoCon = Nothing

%>

Debugging visualizations that use XML functionalityVisualizations that have been generated using Xcelsius contain trace statements that can be used by developers to view the XML calls that are being made by the SWF file. These trace statements are useful when trying to debug visualizations that include XML functionality. SWF files that have been generated using Xcelsius use the FSCommand action to pass along debug

98 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 99: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing the XML Data Button component 4

information that can be viewed by developers. Please refer to the online article from Macromedia regarding Sending messages from Flash to a scripting language for more information on how the FSCommand action works. See the online help for a direct link to this article.

Example: Debugging a SWF fileThe full source code for this sample outlined below can be found in the \developer\xml debug subdirectory which is located in your Xcelsius install directory. Locate that directory on your machine and take a look at the debugXcelsius.htm sample file.The key to understanding the sample is understanding the interaction between the embedded instance of the Flash Player and the JavaScript function that handles the FSCommand event. Take a look at the following snippets of code from the debugXcelsius.htm file:<SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">

<!-- function debugMovie_DoFSCommand(command, args) { if (command == "Displayf") { document.frm_main.debugText.value = document.frm_main.debugText.value + args + "\n";}}

//--></SCRIPT>

<OBJECT classid="clsid:D27CDB6E-AE6D-11cf-96B8-444553540000"codebase="http://download.macromedia.com/pub/shockwave/cabs/flash/swflash.cab#version=6,0,40,0"WIDTH="800" HEIGHT="600" id="debugMovie"><PARAM NAME=movie VALUE="Stocks.swf"> <PARAM NAME=quality VALUE=high><PARAM NAME=bgcolor VALUE=#FFFFFF><EMBED src="Stocks.swf" quality=high bgcolor=#FFFFFF WIDTH="800" HEIGHT="600" NAME="debugMovie" ALIGN="" TYPE="application/x-shockwave-flash" PLUGINSPAGE="http://www.macromedia.com/go/getflashplayer"swLiveConnect=true></EMBED></OBJECT>

In this sample, when the XML Data button is clicked and data is loaded, several XML data events occur. The SWF file triggers a FSCommand action for each event with the following arguments:• command = the string “Displayf" - This is the Event ID that the script

that handles the FSCommand call needs to look for.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 99

Page 100: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing collaboration components4

• args = a string value that contains the event description - This string will contain the debug information that indicates which XML data event occurred. In this sample args is the string value that is displayed in the text field.

When the FSCommand action is triggered by the Stocks.swf file that is embedded in the HTML page the Flash Player looks for a function handler called objectname_DoFSCommand to pass the FSCommand arguments to. In this sample the embedded Flash Player object is called debugMovie so the JavaScript handler function needs to be called debugMovie_DoFSCommand.

Using collaboration componentsXcelsius provides tools for you to create collaborative applications. You can setup your applications to allow multiple users to save and load application states to a central source, or share and present data with each other in real-time. For example, results of what-if analysis can be saved and shared across the globe by configuring collaboration components and adding a Remote Scenario Button component to your visualization. Note: Imported SWF files within Xcelsius visualizations will not have collaboration functionality unless explicitly designed to do so.

Configuring the Flash Communication ServerBefore Xcelsius visualizations with collaboration components can be created, a Macromedia Flash Communication Server must be installed and configured properly. This one server can be used for any number of collaborative applications you create so long as the Flash Communication Server license permits. Note: By default the Flash Communication Server is configured to communicate through port 1935 using Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMP). If a firewall that blocks either port 1935 or RTMP protocol exists between the Flash Communication Server and the Xcelsius visualization, the server can be configured to allow communication over different ports or over HTTP for collaboration to work properly. For more information, see the Macromedia article, available at: http://www.macromedia.com/devnet/flashcom/articles/firewalls_proxy.html. Once the server has been installed, some additional scripts must be added to the server installation to allow Xcelsius applications to collaborate. The following files can be found in the /developer/collaboration/server directory of the Xcelsius installation: • IMComponents.asc should be placed in the /scriptlib directory.

100 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 101: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing collaboration components 4

• IMPeople.asc should be placed in the /scriptlib/components directory.• IMUser.asc should be placed in the /scriplib/components directory.You can now begin creating server applications that your Xcelsius visualizations can connect to.

Creating the Flash Communication Server application To create a Flash Communication Server application

1. Locate the /applications directory of the Flash Communication Server installation.

2. Create a new subdirectory.The name you specify will become the name of your new application.

3. Copy the main.asc template into the subdirectory.The main.asc template can be found in the /developer/collaboration/server directory of the Xcelsius installation.This creates the script the Flash Communication Server will execute.

4. To restrict access to your server application, modify the myListener.onConnect() function of the main.asc file. This function is configured to receive a username and password as arguments. If the function returns true for the given username and password, the user is allowed to connect. If the function returns false, the user is not allowed to connect. The function must return a boolean for collaboration to work properly.

Creating collaborative applications with XcelsiusOnce the Flash Communication Server has been setup correctly, you can create collaborative Xcelsius visualizations with the Collaboration section of the Export Settings dialog box. Click Enable Collaboration and enter the URL of the Flash Communication Server that will communicate with the Xcelsius visualization. The Gateway URL is comprised of the following elements:• Protocol

The transfer protocol to be used for communications between the Xcelsius visualization and the Flash Communication Server. This should be set to rtmp unless a firewall that blocks RTMP protocol exists between

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 101

Page 102: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing collaboration components4

the Flash Communication Server and the Xcelsius visualization. Otherwise, the protocol can be set to rtmpt or rtmps to tunnel communications through HTTP or HTTPS respectively.When using the protocol rtmp, the Xcelsius visualization will first attempt to connect to the Flash Communication server on port 1935 using RTMP. If this fails, it will attempt to connect to the server on port 443 through RTMP. If this also fails, it will attempt to connect to the server on port 80 through RTMP. If this also fails, it will make a last attempt to connect to the server on port 80 through HTTP. When using the protocol rtmpt, the visualization will attempt to connect on port 80 through HTTP.When using the protocol rtmps, the visualization will attempt to connect on port 443 through HTTP.If the Xcelsius visualization is configured to connect to the Flash Communication Server over HTTP protocol, the server itself must also be configured to allow transfer over that protocol.

• Server Address (Optional) If the Xcelsius visualization and the Flash Communication Server are running on the same machine, you can leave the server address blank and the visualization uses the server on the local machine. If the Flash Communication Server is running on another machine, you must enter a server address. This is the DNS name or IP address of the Flash Communication Server.

• Application Name The name of the application to connect to on the server. This application controls which users can connect to the server.

• Port (Optional) You can specify a port for communication to travel over in case a firewall between the Xcelsius visualization and the Flash Communication Server blocks the default ports used for the different protocols. Only one connection attempt will be made using the specified protocol and port. If the Xcelsius visualization is configured to connect to the Flash Communication Server on a specific port, the server must be configured to allow transfer on that port.

• Instance Name (Optional) You can specify an instance name of the server application that you want the Xcelsius visualization to communicate with. Every instance of a server application shares the same server script and validates the same

102 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 103: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing collaboration components 4

users, but each instance stores data separately. If no instance name is specified, the Xcelsius visualization connects to the default instance of the application, _definst_.

When all elements are present in the Gateway URL, the form of the Gateway URL is: “PROTOCOL://SERVER_ADDRESS:PORT/APPLICATION_NAME/INSTANCE_NAME”. Consult your Flash Communication Server administrator for more information on what Gateway URL to use for your specific configuration and needs.

Unique keyTo keep different Xcelsius visualizations from interfering with each other when collaborating, each visualization is generated with a unique key that is used to differentiate it from other visualizations. This lets you tie several visualizations to one Gateway URL without interfering with each other. Re-generating the visualization will change the key and the new application will not collaborate with older visualizations.

ConnectionApplications you generate with Xcelsius can connect to the Flash Communication Server in the following ways:• Automatically• With the Login component When using the Automatic connection method, you can have a Password sent to the Flash Communication Server. The Flash Communication Server script checks this password to determine whether or not to allow the connection. The password is always received as the third argument to the script. The password you specify is embedded in the generated SWF file. Users with access to the SWF file can extract the password. For more information on security, see the Flash Communication Server documentation. Click Enable Real Time Collaboration to collaborate the state of the generated application in real-time between connected users. Changes made to the visualization by one user are seen by all other connected users. The speed the changes are shown depends on the speed of your internet connection, your license of Flash Communication Server, and the complexity of the visualization. Note: Imported SWF files within Xcelsius visualizations will not have collaboration functionality unless explicitly designed to do so.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 103

Page 104: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesCreating templates4

Using the Remote Scenario Buttons component

The Remote Scenario Buttons component lets users save the current state of a visualization. Users can save any number of these results, or scenarios, and load them at any time. The scenarios are saved to a remote server, allowing results to be shared with authorized users. The scenarios created are specific to each visualization. Two visualizations can have scenarios with the same name without interfering with one another. Scenarios saved in preview mode will not persist outside of the preview session. This includes exporting and snapshots to PowerPoint or to Outlook.

How does it work?Configure the visualization for collaboration and then add a Remote Scenario Buttons component to the visualization. When running the visualization, users click the Remote Scenario Buttons component to access the option buttons for the scenarios: Save, Load, and Delete. If the visualization is connected to the collaboration server, when an options is selected, a dialog box appears. If the visualization is not connected to the collaboration server, the remote scenarios are inaccessible, and the Not Connected dialog box will appear. Loading a saved scenario should restore the visualization to the state in which it was saved. There are a few cosmetic exceptions. The states of external SWF files are also not restored when a scenario is loaded.

Creating templatesThis section describes Xcelsius Templates. Xcelsius offers a set of templates you can use to create a new visualization. You can use the existing Xcelsius templates, or you can create a visualization from scratch and save it as a template. To open a template, on the File menu, click New From Template. A list of available libraries is available. Each library contains a group of templates that are displayed under the Items section. As you select each template in the list, a preview of the template is shown on the right side of the screen. These are interactive templates. You can click on them to see the intended functionality of the components. Select a template from the list and click OK.

104 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 105: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing Global Styles 4

When selected, the template is inserted on the canvas as a new visualization. You can now add, delete or modify the template, and save it as a new visualization or as a modified or new template.

Custom-made libraries and templates You can create your own libraries and templates. For example, if you are creating a set of Portlets for use in your corporate portal, you may want to save your visualizations as templates so that you can re-use them when updates are necessary. You can create multiple libraries and templates.

To create a new template1. Create the Xcelsius visualization you want to save as a template.2. On the File menu, click Save As.

The Save As dialog box appears.3. Navigate to the folder of the library where you want to save the template.

Note: To create a new library, create a new folder under the /template directory of the Xcelsius installation.

4. Enter a file name for the XLF file, and click Save.The file name becomes the name of the new template.

5. On the File menu, point to Export, and click Macromedia Flash (SWF).6. Navigate to the folder where you saved the XLF template.7. Enter the same file name for the SWF file that you entered for the XLF

file, and click Save to export the visualization.Exporting the visualization creates the template preview that will be displayed in the Preview section of the Templates window.

The visualization is now available as a template. The next time you open the templates window, your template will be available for preview and use. If you create a visualization you think would make a good template, you can email it to us at [email protected].

Using Global StylesGlobal Styles alter the appearance of your visualization. You can customize your entire visualization, or only certain components. Global Styles affect components hierarchically. That is the primary colors you specify affect the components

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 105

Page 106: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing Global Styles4

before the secondary colors. Global Styles are divided into application categories: Styles, Text and Labels, and Buttons and Background. You can create your own Global Style based on modifications you have made to an existing Global Style or combination of Global Styles. Global Style modifications do not affect fonts, text formatting, or alerts, only the color of the visualization.Note: Global Styles are not transferred with XLF files. If the Global Style used by an XLF is unavailable, the style will continue to be used by the existing components in the visualization, but it will not be able to be applied to new components.

Changing the current Global StyleTo change the current Global Style, on the View menu, click Change Style. The Global Styles dialog box appears. Before you change the style, the Default style is applied to your visualization. The Default style is a special Global Style. The style parameters are taken from the skin, and you cannot modify them. The Default style can be used to revert to the original appearance of a visualization. In the Global Styles dialog box, select a Global Style from the Current Style list. Click Apply to apply the selected Global Style to the components on the canvas. Click OK to apply the selected Global Style to components that will be placed on the canvas. The Global Style that is applied to the visualization, is displayed on the Component Explorer.

Creating a Global StyleA Global Style is created when you modify the style parameters of your visualization and save it as a style.Note: When creating a Global Style, define a set of custom colors. Normally five custom colors is sufficient. Before you begin assigning colors to your components, add these colors to the custom color palette. To access the color palette, click on any custom color selector button. For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

To create a global style1. Create an Xcelsius visualization.2. On the View menu, click Change Style.

The Global Styles dialog box appears.3. On the Current Style list, select a global style to be modified.

106 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 107: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing Global Styles 4

4. Click Save As.The Save Crystal Xcelsius Style dialog box appears.

5. Enter a name for the new style and click Save.6. In the Borders and Lines area, click the Primary Color color selector

button and select a new primary color.For this example, select orange.Note: In the Current Style list the style has been labeled as modified, this will be updated when you save the style.

7. Modify the other colors of the new style.8. Click Save As and replace the style.9. Click Apply.

The new style is applied to the components on the canvas.10. Click OK.

The new style is applied to any components that will be added to the visualization.

Note: When you close Xcelsius the Global style is not attached to the visualization. You will need to re-apply or select the Global Style to continue working with it.

Transferring Global StylesGlobal Styles are not transferred with XLF files. To make a Global Style created on one machine available to another, you must transfer the file containing the style information. For every style you create, an XGS file is created with the same name as the style. The XGS file stores all the style information. By default, these files are saved to the /styles directory of the Xcelsius installation. To copy a Global Style from one machine to another, simply the corresponding XGS file from the source machine onto the other machine. If the file is placed in the /styles directory of the Xcelsius installation of the other machine, the new Global Style will automatically appear in the Current Style list on the Global Styles dialog box. You can manually import the style by clicking browse on the Current Style list, navigating to the XGS file and clicking Save.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 107

Page 108: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Using Advanced FeaturesUsing Global Styles4

108 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 109: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Exporting Crystal Xcelsius Visualizations

chapter

Page 110: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Exporting Crystal Xcelsius VisualizationsOverview5

Overview

This chapter provides information on exporting your Crystal Xcelsius visualization.

Exporting your visualization to FlashOnce your visualization is complete, you can export your content as a Macromedia Flash (SWF) file. The SWF file can be executed locally with the standalone Flash player, opened in a browser, used as part of a web site, or imported into a number of different programs.

To export an Xcelsius visualization to Flash1. Create an Xcelsius visualization.2. On the File menu, point to Export, and click Macromedia Flash (SWF).

The Export Macromedia Flash (SWF) dialog box appears.3. Enter a name for the SWF file, and click Save.Xcelsius generates the Macromedia Flash file. Note: If there are any non-embedded external files in the visualization, a folder containing those files is also generated with the same name and location as the exported file. The visualization loads the external files from this directory at runtime. The visualization and folder must exist in the same directory for the external files to be loaded correctly.

Exporting your visualization to HTMLNot all computers are configured to open Flash files in the browser. By embedding your SWF visualization in an HTML file, your users can view the visualization through an HTML file, by double-clicking one file. The generated HTML document references your SWF visualization.

To export an Xcelsius visualization to HTML1. Create an Xcelsius visualization.2. On the File menu, point to Export, and click HTML.

The Publish to HTML dialog box appears.3. Enter a name for the HTML file, and click Save.Xcelsius generates the HTML file and a SWF file in the same directory with the same name. These files must be kept together in order for the HTML file to work properly.

110 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 111: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Exporting Crystal Xcelsius VisualizationsExporting your visualization to PowerPoint 5

Exporting your visualization to PowerPointOnce your visualization is complete, you can export it as a PowerPoint slide. You can modify the slide using Microsoft PowerPoint.You can preview your visualization as a PowerPoint slide. Click the Send to Powerpoint button on the toolbar. PowerPoint is launched your visualization is inserted in a slide. The visualization in the slide is dynamic and interactive. You can save the preview presentation as a PowerPoint presentation.Note: External files that are referenced relatively by the visualization will not be available in the preview presentation.

To export an Xcelsius visualization to PowerPoint1. Create an Xcelsius visualization.2. On the File menu, point to Export, and click PowerPoint Slide.

The Export Powerpoint (PPT) dialog box appears.3. Enter a name for the PPT file, and click Save.Xcelsius generates the PowerPoint (PPT) file and a SWF file with the same name. The generated PowerPoint file is automatically opened and the visualization will be visible on the first slide of the presentation. When the presentation is run, the visualization is dynamic and interactive. Note: When the visualization is exported, any external files used by External components are created and placed in a folder with the same name and location as the exported visualization. The external files must remain in the same folder as the visualization for the visualization to work properly.

Exporting your visualization to Adobe PDFOnce your visualization is complete, you can export your content as an Adobe® Portable Document Format (PDF) file. The PDF file can be viewed locally, opened in a browser, or deployed on a web site. The visualization is embedded in the PDF and is dynamic and interactive. You can preview your visualization as a PDF. Click the Send to Adobe Acrobat PDF button on the toolbar. Adobe Acrobat is launched and your visualization is displayed on the first page. The visualization in the PDF is dynamic and interactive. You can save the preview presentation as a PDF.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 111

Page 112: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Exporting Crystal Xcelsius VisualizationsEmailing your visualization with Outlook5

To export an Xcelsius visualization to Adobe PDF1. Create an Xcelsius visualization.2. On the File menu, point to Export, and click Adobe PDF.

The Export Adobe PDF dialog box appears.3. Enter a name for the PDF file, and click Save.Xcelsius generates the Adobe PDF file. The generated PDF file is automatically opened and the visualization is visible on the first page of the document. The visualization in the PDF file is dynamic and interactive. Note: When the visualization is exported, any external files used by External components, are created and placed in a folder with the same name and location as the exported visualization. The external files must remain in the same folder as the visualization for the visualization to work properly.

Emailing your visualization with OutlookOnce your visualization is complete, you can export it using Microsoft Outlook. You can preview your visualization in Outlook. Click the Send to Outlook button on the toolbar. Outlook is launched and your visualization is inserted in an email. The visualization is dynamic and interactive. You can use this email as an exported visualization.

To export an Xcelsius visualization with Outlook1. Create an Xcelsius visualization.2. On the File menu, point to Export, and click Outlook.Xcelsius generates a SWF file. Outlook is launched and the SWF file is attached to a new email message that can be customized and sent.

Exporting your visualization to a Plumtree portal

Once your visualization is complete, you can export it to a Plumtree portal. The visualization in the Plumtree Portal is dynamic and interactive.

To export an Xcelsius visualization to a Plumtree portal1. Create an Xcelsius visualization.2. On the File menu, point to Export, and click Macromedia Flash (SWF).

The Export Macromedia Flash (SWF) dialog box appears.

112 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 113: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Exporting Crystal Xcelsius VisualizationsExporting your visualization to Word 5

3. Enter a name for the SWF file, and click Save.Xcelsius generates the Macromedia Flash file.

4. Place the SWF visualization on your web server.5. In Xcelsius, on the File menu, point to Export, and click Plumtree.

The Plumtree Export Options dialog box appears.6. Customize the size of your visualization in the Plumtree portal.

Note: Click Scale ->X and Scale ->Y to maintain the proportions of the visualization.

7. In the URL Path box, type the URL of the visualization you placed on the web server.

8. Click Publish.Xcelsius generates an HTML file with the name of the SWF file that references the visualization at the URL path. Note: The SWF file must be exported to the location you set in the URL path. The HTML file must have access to the SWF file. By creating a gadget from this HTML file, your Xcelsius visualization can be added directly into your Plumtree portal. For information on creating gadgets, refer to the Plumtree documentation.

Exporting your visualization to WordWhen your visualization is complete, you can export it to a Microsoft Word document. The visualization in the Microsoft Word document is dynamic and interactive.You can preview your visualization in a Word document. Click the Send to Microsoft Word button on the toolbar. Microsoft Word is launched and your visualization is displayed on the first page. The visualization in the Word document is dynamic and interactive. You can save the preview document as a Word document.

To export an Xcelsius visualization to Word1. Create an Xcelsius visualization.2. On the File menu, point to Export, and click Word.

The Export Word (DOC) dialog box appears.3. Enter a name for the Word document, and click Save.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 113

Page 114: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Exporting Crystal Xcelsius VisualizationsExporting your visualization to an Enterprise folder5

Xcelsius generates a Word document and embeds a SWF of your visualization in the document.Note: If your visualization in Word is static, on the Microsoft Word Control toolbar click the Exit Design Mode button.

Exporting your visualization to an Enterprise folder

When your visualization is complete, you can export it to a folder in BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server.

To export an Xcelsius visualization to an Enterprise folder1. Create an Xcelsius visualization.2. On the File menu, point to Export, and click BusinessObjects

Enterprise.Crystal Xcelsius automatically generates a SWF file using the XLF file.The Log On to BusinessObjects Enterprise dialog box appears.

3. Enter your logon information.a. In the System field, type the name of the Central Management

Server (CMS) that you want to export the SWF file to.The CMS stores information about the objects saved to the Enterprise system. For more information about the CMS, refer to the BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server guides.

b. In the User name and Password fields, type your logon credentials.c. On the Authentication list, click the appropriate authentication type.If you are unsure of your logon information, contact your system administrator.

4. Click OK. The Save As dialog box appears and displays the folder structure of the Enterprise repository.

5. Select the folder that you want to export the SWF file to, enter a file name, and click Save.The SWF file is exported to the Enterprise repository.

114 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 115: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Exporting Crystal Xcelsius VisualizationsTaking a snapshot of your visualization 5

Taking a snapshot of your visualizationThe Snapshot menu items allow you to export the current preview data. To enable the snapshot feature, you must be in preview mode. On the File menu, point to Snapshot and click one of the following export methods:• Back to Excel

An Excel spreadsheet (XLS) with the changes made in preview mode is generated.Note: • This option is only available when an Excel spreadsheet has been

imported into the visualization.• To export a copy of the original Excel file imported into the

visualization, on the Data menu, click Export Model and save the file.• Macromedia Flash (SWF)

A Macromedia Flash (SWF) file with the changes made in preview mode is generated.

• HTMLAn HTML file and a Macromedia Flash (SWF) with the changes made in preview mode are generated.

• PowerPoint SlideA Microsoft PowerPoint file with one slide that contains a Macromedia Flash (SWF) file with the changes made in preview mode is generated.

• OutlookA Microsoft Outlook email that contains the Macromedia Flash (SWF) file with the changes made in preview mode is generated.

• Adobe PDFAn Adobe PDF file with the changes made in preview mode is generated.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 115

Page 116: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Exporting Crystal Xcelsius VisualizationsTaking a snapshot of your visualization5

116 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 117: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Crystal Xcelsius Integration with SQL Server Reporting Services

chapter

Page 118: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Integration with SQL Server Reporting ServicesCrystal Xcelsius and SQL Server Reporting Services6

Crystal Xcelsius and SQL Server Reporting Services

Crystal Xcelsius uses Xcelsius Reporting Services (XRS) to dynamically populate Crystal Xcelsius visualizations based on SQL Server Reporting Services (RS) data. XRS allows users to connect to an RS report through the Xcelsius interface and to create visualizations that can easily be updated.

Xcelsius Reporting Services serverYou can perform the following tasks within the Reporting Services (RS) server:• Configure reports and how they run.• Set user security and viewing rights.• Configure caching and scheduling for reports

Note: You can only do this is you have administrative rights.The Web.config file located at <drive>:\inetpub\wwwroot\xrs is where this server configuration occurs. The most important section of this file, where the configuration takes place, is shown here.<appSettings><add key="ReportingServicesUrl" value="http://xrsdemo-sd/

ReportServer" /><add key="ReportServerUrl" value="http://xrsdemo-sd/Reports"

/><add key="XrsServicesUrl" value="http://xrsdemo-sd/xrs" /></appSettings>

Using and configuring the Reporting Services Button component

The Reporting Services Button component in Crystal Xcelsius enables you to connect to the XRS server and select the report that will be used to populate the visualization.After you place the Reporting Services Button component on the canvas and open its Properties panel, configuring the Reporting Services Button component consists of the steps outlined here.

118 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 119: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Integration with SQL Server Reporting ServicesUsing and configuring the Reporting Services Button component 6

Step 1: Select a report to use for the visualization To select a report

1. Double-click the Reporting Services Button component to open its Properties Panel.

2. On the General tab, click Select Report.The Select Report dialog box opens.

3. In the Xcelsius for Reporting Services URL field, enter the URL for the Reporting Service web service that you want to bind the component to.

4. Click Submit.This binds the component to the service that was entered in the Xcelsius for Reporting Services URL field.

5. Click Launch Report in Web Browser to launch the selected report in a web browser.You may be prompted for logon credentials.

6. Select a report from the tree view to preview it and to view the details of any report parameters.Note: The preview display is limited to a maximum of 21 lines of the available data.

7. When you have finished selecting your report, click OK to return to the Properties panel.

Step 2: Select the report parameters To select report parameters

1. In the Report Parameters area of the Properties panel General tab, click Use Service Values or Link to Cell.

2. If you selected Link to Cell, go to step 3. If you selected Use Service Values, click one of the options in the list below Use Service Values.

3. If you selected Link to Cell, enter a valid parameter value in the field under Link to Cell or click the Cell Selector button to select a valid parameter in the spreadsheet.

4. Select the Display Parameters at Run Time check box if you want the parameter selection to show automatically at run time.

Note: • When a new valid parameter value is entered,Crystal Xcelsius queries the

server for updated data. This process may take a few seconds to complete.• Ensure the retrieved data is the appropriate data type and format.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 119

Page 120: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Integration with SQL Server Reporting ServicesUsing and configuring the Reporting Services Button component6

Step 3: Specify the data mapping method

Use the options in the Data Mapping area on the General tab of the Properties panel to specify the data mapping method and the data to be mapped for the particular report you are using.

To specify the data mapping method1. Click Default or Advanced.2. If you clicked Advanced, go to step 3. If you clicked Default, click the Cell

Selector button adjacent to Range to map the data to a spreadsheet range. The text below the range shows the recommended maximum number of columns to map based on the report data structure.

3. If you clicked Advanced, the following options appear for specifying the data mapping method.• Advanced data mapping options

Use these options to specify the advanced data mapping method for the report you are using.Advanced data mapping allows multiple mappings of the data from the same report. The data can be mapped differently in each mapping, allowing a choice of which columns of data to map and the order of those data columns.

• Adding and deleting rangesClick the Add button to add a new mapped range. The new mapped range appears in the Mapped Ranges box. A default name is given to the new range and default ordered data columns appear in the Selected Columns box.Click the Del button to delete the selected mapped range. Any mapping to the spreadsheet for this mapped range is also deleted. Note: To change the default range name, select the range in the Mapped Ranges box, and type a new name in the Name box.

• Selected ColumnsThe Selected Columns box shows the columns of data that will be mapped for the currently selected mapped range.Use the buttons under the Selected Columns box to delete or move columns.

120 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 121: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Integration with SQL Server Reporting ServicesUsing and configuring the Reporting Services Button component 6

• RangeClick the Cell Selector button adjacent to Range to map the data to a spreadsheet range. The text below the range shows the recommended maximum number of columns to map based on the report data structure.

About security credentialsSome web services may prompt you for logon credentials to access the data. The credentials that are entered remain valid for the current server and session, but will be lost when Crystal Xcelsius is closed.Authentication is done on a server basis so any report accessed from a different server requires a different set of logon credentials.To reset logon credentials for a server, click the user reset button adjacent to the submit button. This action resets the username and password for the server in the Xcelsius for Reporting Services URL field.Note: When a SWF file is viewed outside of Xcelsius, the default browser in use prompts users for logon credentials.

Step 4: Get Report DataTo get report data, click the Get Report Data button. The XRS service is queried and a snapshot of the latest report data is imported into the range or ranges of cells currently mapped in the Excel spreadsheet.When the Get Report Data button is clicked, the following actions occur:• Any previously imported XRS data is cleared. • The XRS server is queried to get the latest data for the report. • The Excel file in Xcelsius is updated with the new data. • The Properties panel closes.• The XLF file is updated with the new data. If the Default Data Mapping option is selected, the spreadsheet is updated with default formatted data. If the Advanced Data Mapping option is selected, the spreadsheet is updated with data for each mapped range.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 121

Page 122: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Integration with SQL Server Reporting ServicesUsing and configuring the Reporting Services Button component6

122 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 123: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Integration with Sharepoint

chapter

Page 124: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Integration with SharepointXcelsius for Sharepoint7

Xcelsius for Sharepoint

Crystal Xcelsius support for Sharepoint enables you to create dashboards within the Sharepoint portal environment. Administrators can provide complex visualizations or simple Xcelsius components that can be customized by users.Crystal Xcelsius supports the following Sharepoint scenarios:• Visualizations can be connected to Sharepoint lists.• Visualizations can communicate with one another. This scenario is useful

for what-if analyses or drill-downs.• Users can customize their visualizations, such as the data, components,

alert levels, date ranges, and default parameters that will be used.

Xcelsius for Sharepoint serverXcelsius for Sharepoint server (XSP) installs a web part container into the Sharepoint web part library. After installation and configuration, the web part container can be added to the Web Part Gallery within Sharepoint and any user with the appropriate rights can add the web part container to a page within the site.

Deploying Crystal Xcelsius visualizations in SharepointThis section discusses the steps required to deploy Crystal Xcelsius visualization in Sharepoint

Step 1: Add Xcelsius Sharepoint to web page To add Crystal Xcelsius to a Sharepoint web page

1. Navigate to the web page that the visualization will reside in.2. Go to Modify Shared Page > Add Web Parts > Browse to open the

Web Part Gallery.3. Locate the Xcelsius Sharepoint Connector and drag it to the location on

the page where the visualization will reside.

Step 2: Configure Xcelsius Sharepoint web part To configure the Xcelsius Sharepoint web part

1. Click the down arrow on the Xcelsius Sharepoint Connector and then click Modify Shared Web Part.The Properties dialog box opens. The property used during this initial configuration is Xcelsius Visualization Source.

124 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 125: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Integration with SharepointXcelsius for Sharepoint 7

2. Import the visualization that you are configuring.To populate the web part with a visualization, that visualization should already be imported into the Sharepoint library of documents. It is usually best to create a document list for all visualizations so they can be accessed from the same location.

3. Click the link to open the imported visualization and find its exact URL.4. Copy the URL into the Xcelsius Visualization Source field on the Web

Part properties dialog box and click Apply.The visualization appears in the web part on the page. If there are any parameters defined in the visualization, they appear on the Property dialog box below the Width parameter. These parameters can be set at anytime by navigating to the property dialog box, setting the parameters and clicking Apply.

Note: Parameters can be of 5 types, Text, Numeric, Check Box, Date, and List Box. They can be used to set the value of any cell within the visualization. More information about parameters can be found in the description of the Sharepoint Parameter component in the XSP client section.

Step 3: Connect the web part to other web partsWhen in modify Shared web part mode the user can also connect the visualization to other visualizations or to other web parts that can pass it data, such as a Sharepoint List.

To connect the web part to other web parts1. Click the down arrow on the Xcelsius Sharepoint Connector and then

click Modify Shared Web Part.2. Click the down arrow on the web part and then click Connections.

If Connections is unavailable, the visualization was not configured to connect to another web part.If Connections is available, after you click it you see options such as Consume Row, Send Value, Get Value, and Send list. This means that the visualization is configured to either send information to another web part (Provider) or receive information from another web part (Consumer). These options are discussed in more detail in the Sharepoint Consumer and Sharepoint Provider component sections of this chapter.

3. If a visualization has been configured to receive a value from another visualization, add both visualizations to the page.

4. Click the down arrow on the web part and then click Connections.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 125

Page 126: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Integration with SharepointXcelsius for Sharepoint Client7

5. Click Get value from and select the other Xcelsius Sharepoint Web Part. The two visualizations are now connected.

These connections can be configured in many ways to allow for What-If analysis, drilling down to more detailed data, or to allow a user interaction in one visualization to affect other visualizations.

Xcelsius for Sharepoint ClientThe Xcelsius for Sharepoint (XSP) client includes three components.• Sharepoint Consumer• Sharepoint Provider• Sharepoint ParamThese components are added to a visualization that needs to have parameters defined or that needs to pass or received data from another web part.

Sharepoint Consumer ComponentThe Sharepoint Consumer component should be added to any visualization that will accept data from a web part within Sharepoint. There are three important options on the Properties panel of the Sharepoint Consumer component, Name, Range, and Type.• Name

Name is user-defined and is displayed when connecting web parts together in Sharepoint. Name is required or the web parts cannot be connected together.

• RangeRange is the area on the internal spreadsheet of the visualization that the incoming data will be written to.

• TypeType defines the amount of data that will be passed. Cell consumes a single cell from another web part. Row is a single row with multiple columns. Table is multiple rows and columns. If another visualization is passing in data, the most likely type to select is cell or row. Table is used to pass data from a Sharepoint list.

126 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 127: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Integration with SharepointXcelsius for Sharepoint Client 7

PropertiesThe Sharepoint Consumer component is transparent when the SWF file is created, so there is no need to hide it behind other components. It is not selectable or visible in the SWF.

Sharepoint Provider ComponentThe Sharepoint Provider Component should be added to any visualization that will provide data to another web part. In this case only Crystal Xcelsius Sharepoint web parts can be used to consume information from a visualization that is using the Sharepoint Provider component.The Sharepoint Provider Component contains the same options as the Sharepoint Consumer components. See “Sharepoint Consumer Component” on page 126 for details about these three options.

PropertiesThere are other options on the provider web part that are consistent with other Xcelsius data connectors. The Sharepoint Provider is actually a button rather than a non-selectable component like the Sharepoint Consumer.After selecting what value is going to be passed to other visualizations, the Sharepoint Provider component can be used as a button to pass the information. The information can also be passed dynamically by using the Trigger Cell option on the Behavior tab of the Properties panel. Set the Trigger Cell to be the same cell or range that was defined in the Range on the General tab. This way anytime the value changes it is dynamically passed to other connected visualizations.The dynamic visibility can also be set for this component as it is a button that the designer may want to display at different times depending on the logic of the visualization.Like other buttons, the Appearance tab can be used to set the look of the button.

Sharepoint Param ComponentThe Sharepoint Param component allows visualization designers to define parameters that they want the user to customize from within Sharepoint. Different users may want to see the data in different ways.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 127

Page 128: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Integration with SharepointXcelsius for Sharepoint Client7

There are three important options on the Properties panel of the Sharepoint Param component:• Name

Name is user-defined and will be displayed for the visualization in the property dialog box in Sharepoint. Name is required or the parameter will not be listed as a parameter in Sharepoint.

• RangeRange is the area in the visualization’s internal spreadsheet on which the parameters will set.

• TypeType defines type of parameter. The parameter can be Text, Numeric, Check Box, Date, or List Box.• Text is used to set any text based data within the XLF. For example,

chart titles.• Numeric is used to set any numeric based data. For example, alert

levels.• Check Box is useful for on or off functionality that will set the value of

a cell to zero or one. For example, showing or hiding components.• Date is used to define a date in the XLF. It sets the format to Date and

uses a true date value within the XLF. For example, this type can be used to set date ranges for data access or for amount of data to display.

• List Box enables the designer to build options into the parameters. When List Box is selected, two more options become available.• List Box Entries

List Box Entries is used to set what entries are available for the user to select.

• List Box DefaultList Box Default is used for selecting which value will be used by default if the user does not select a value.

The List Box type allows the designer to specify set values that can be selected by the user. Text, Numeric, Check Box, and Date allow the user to enter any value into the parameter. If the value they enter is not compatible with the visualization, the correct behavior will not occur. The List Box type eliminates this issue because the user must select values the designer provides.

128 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 129: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Integration with SharepointXcelsius for Sharepoint Client 7

PropertiesThe Sharepoint Consumer component is transparent when the SWF file is created, so there is no need to hide it behind other components. It is not selectable or visible in the SWF.

Exporting VisualizationsOnce the XLF file has been created it needs to be exported as a SWF file.

To export the XLF file1. Click File and then click Export.2. Click Sharepoint and select the location where the visualization should

be created.After the export occurs, a Sharepoint user can import the visualization into the Sharepoint document library.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 129

Page 130: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Integration with SharepointXcelsius for Sharepoint Client7

130 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 131: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration Features

chapter

Page 132: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesOverview8

Overview

Crystal Xcelsius Designer 4.5 enables you to create interactive presentations from managed Enterprise data. Using the new LiveOffice Connector in Crystal Xcelsius Designer and the new Live Office Web Services in BusinessObjects Enterprise XI Release 2 (XI R2) or Crystal Reports Server XI R2, you can create and refresh Xcelsius Visualizations against managed Enterprise data.This chapter discusses how to use Excel spreadsheets built in Live Office as data sources for Crystal Xcelsius files. It also discusses how to manage Crystal Xcelsius XLF files and SWF files in BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server.Note: • The functionality discussed in this chapter is only supported in

BusinessObjects Enterprise XI R2 and Crystal Reports Server XI R2.• Single Sign-on is not supported in this release.• This document assumes working knowledge of Live Office and

BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server.• For information specific to using Crystal Xcelsius Designer, see the

Online Help and Quick Start Guide in Crystal Xcelsius Designer.

Terms used in this documentThere are terms used in this document that you may not be familiar with. Look at this list to see what these terms refer to.• XLF

This is a Crystal Xcelsius Designer design file. It is the file that is created within the designer and where all the functionality of the future Xcelsius Visualization is configured.

• SWFThis is a Macromedia Flash file. Crystal Xcelsius uses Macromedia Flash to render interactive files.

• Xcelsius VisualizationThis term is used for the final output of an Xcelsius file. For example, when you create a file in the Crystal Xcelsius Designer and export it to PowerPoint, the PowerPoint file is an Xcelsius Visualization.

• Live Office-enabledThis term is used to describe an Excel spreadsheet that is created from a Live Office data source.

132 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 133: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesMoving from an unmanaged environment to a managed environment 8

Moving from an unmanaged environment to a managed environment

If you have upgraded from the Crystal Vision bundle, you likely have Live Office report views that are based on unmanaged Crystal reports. To take advantage of the refresh capabilities of the LiveOffice Connector component in Crystal Xcelsius Designer and the viewing and distribution capabilities of BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server, you must move to managed files. You can publish your unmanaged Crystal report to BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server and then update your Xcelsius visualizations to take advantage of the functionality available in Crystal Xcelsius Designer 4.5.This section outlines the steps to move from an unmanaged environment to a managed environment. It does not describe each step in detail but instead gives an overview of the workflow involved. For detailed information on how to perform each step, you are referred to the appropriate product guide.

To move to a managed system1. Publish your unmanaged Crystal reports to Crystal Reports Server or

BusinessObjects Enterprise. For detailed information about how to publish reports, refer to the chapter “Publishing Reports to Crystal Reports Server” in the Crystal Reports Server XI Release 2 Installation Guide or the chapter “Publishing Objects to BusinessObjects Enterprise” in the BusinessObjects Enterprise XI Administrator’s Guide.

2. In Live Office, set the location of the report view that you want to update to be managed. Set this location to the location of it’s new managed report source.For detailed information about how to set the location of a Live Office report view, refer to the chapter “Creating Report Views from Unmanaged Reports” in the Live Office User Guide.

3. Open the XLF that you want to modify with the updated report view and re-import the spreadsheet.For detailed information about how to re-import a spreadsheet, see “Re-importing the Excel file” on page 36.

4. Add the LiveOffice Connector to the XLF and configure it.For detailed information about how to do this, see “Creating an Xcelsius visualization from a Live Office- enabled Excel spreadsheet” on page 134. Specifically refer to the procedure called “To make the Xcelsius file refreshable.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 133

Page 134: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesUsing Live Office data for Crystal Xcelsius visualizations8

5. Save the XLF file to your Enterprise system or export a SWF file to your Enterprise system.For detailed information about how to do this, see “Storing Xcelsius files in Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise” on page 137.

Using Live Office data for Crystal Xcelsius visualizations

With Crystal Xcelsius Designer 4.5, you can create Crystal Xcelsius XLF (design files) and SWF (Macromedia Flash files) using Excel spreadsheets constructed from managed Crystal Reports or Web Intelligence data.The new Live Office Web Services in Crystal Reports Server and BusinessObjects Enterprise enables you to refresh Xcelsius SWF files and Xcelsius Visualizations from within InfoView. The BusinessObjects Enterprise Web Services enables you to refresh the data from outside InfoView, as long as you can connect to your Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise system.Depending on the data that is contained in the Excel spreadsheet, you can perform a variety of tasks in Crystal Xcelsius that allow you to interact with Enterprise data.

Creating an Xcelsius visualization from a Live Office- enabled Excel spreadsheet

You can create an Xcelsius Visualization using data in a Live Office-enabled Excel spreadsheet. Live Office-enabled means that the data in the spreadsheet is actually a View created from either managed Crystal reports or managed Web Intelligence documents.After you have created a Live Office-enabled file in Xcelsius, you can also make it refreshable against the source data by using the LiveOffice Connector. The LiveOffice Connector is a new component that enables you to connect your Xcelsius file to the data that is managed in Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise.Note: The following procedures assume a working knowledge of Live Office.

134 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 135: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesUsing Live Office data for Crystal Xcelsius visualizations 8

To create an Xcelsius Visualization using Live Office1. Open a new Crystal Xcelsius canvas in the Crystal Xcelsius Designer and

place the component that you want to use to display data on the canvas.2. Double-click the component to open the Properties Panel.3. On the General tab, click the Cell Selector button adjacent to the Display

Data field.You are prompted to import a model.

4. On the Import Model dialog box, click the Browse button and navigate to an Excel spreadsheet that was created using Live Office.

5. Click the spreadsheet and then click OK.The spreadsheet opens in a new window.

6. Select the cell range that you want to include in your Crystal Xcelsius Visualization and then click OK.The spreadsheet closes and the new data is reflected in the Crystal Xcelsius Designer.

To make the Xcelsius file refreshable1. Place the LiveOffice Connector component on the canvas.

This component is under Web Connectivity in the Components Explorer.2. Double-click the LiveOffice Connector to open the Properties Panel.3. On the General tab, type the URL to the Live Office Web Service in the

Live Office Web Services URL field.The default URL listed in the field is http://<webserver>:8080/dswsbobje/services/session

If your BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server has a default Web Services installation, replace <webserver> in the default URL with the name of your CMS to correctly complete the URL.The URL is cached so that you do not have to type it in each time you configure the LiveOffice Connector.

4. In the LiveOffice Connections area of the General tab, click the View that you want the LiveOffice Connector to refresh against.Note: • If your Excel spreadsheet contains more than one View, you can

choose one, some, or all of the View listed in the Views area of the General tab. Only the data from the Views you choose will be refreshed when the Xcelsius file is refreshed.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 135

Page 136: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesUsing Live Office data for Crystal Xcelsius visualizations8

• You can increase the range of cells that your Xcelsius visualization is able to accommodate so that if the data grows, your Xcelsius visualization will grow up to the size you specify.

In the Ranges area of the General tab, you will see the cell ranges that have been imported for the View that is selected in the Views area of the tab.To increase the original range that you selected:a. Click the range that you want to adjust.b. Click the Cell Selector button under the Ranges area.c. Select a new range from your spreadsheet and click OK.

The new cell range is reflected in the field next to the Cell Selector button.

5. On the Behavior tab, set the refresh options you want.• Refresh on Load automatically refreshes the data whenever you

open the file.• Refresh on Interval automatically refreshes on the time interval you

specify. The time is measured in seconds.• If you do not select either of these options, the refresh will be manual

meaning you will have to click a refresh button to have the data refreshed.

6. Export your XLF file to any format you choose.Depending on what option you chose in step 5, the Xcelsius Visualization will be refreshed when you open it, when you click the LiveOffice Connector, or at the time interval you set.

Passing parameters from Crystal Xcelsius to Live OfficeYou can pass parameter values from Crystal Xcelsius Visualization or SWF file to Live Office by taking advantage of Crystal Xcelsius’s ability to pass values to an Excel spreadsheet. In this way, you can input parameter values in your Visualization and have the correct data returned from the data source.

To pass a parameter to Live OfficeNote: This procedure requires a Live Office Excel spreadsheet with a binded parameter. The spreadsheet must require user input for the parameter when it is refreshed.1. Repeat steps 1 through 5 outlined in “Creating an Xcelsius visualization

from a Live Office- enabled Excel spreadsheet” on page 134.

136 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 137: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesStoring Xcelsius files in Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise 8

2. Place a Single Value component such as a gauge or a slider on the canvas.3. Double-click this component to open the Properties Panel.4. On the General tab, click the Cell Selector button next to the Link to Cell

field.The Excel spreadsheet opens.

5. Click the cell that contains the binded parameter and then click OK.6. Double-click the LiveOffice Connector to open the Properties Panel.7. On the Behavior tab, click the Cell Selector button beside the Trigger

Cell field.The spreadsheet opens in a new window.

8. Click the cell that contains the binded parameter and then click OK.9. Ensure that Trigger on Change only is selected.

Configuring the Trigger Behavior this way causes the SWF to refresh each time there is a change to the cell and in this case, the parameter value.

10. Click the Preview button to generate a SWF file.When you adjust the Single Value component in the SWF file, you receive a prompt to log on to your Enterprise system. When you have successfully logged on, the data is refreshed and the new value or values are reflected in your SWF file.

Storing Xcelsius files in Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise

You can use BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server as a secure repository to store and manage XLF and SWF files. Once the files have been added to the Enterprise system, any user with the appropriate rights can log on and view the XLF and SWF files.

Saving XLF files to an Enterprise folderOnce you have created an XLF file, you can save it to a folder in BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server.

To save an XLF file to an Enterprise folder1. In Crystal Xcelsius Designer, on the File menu, click Save.

The Save As dialog box appears.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 137

Page 138: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesStoring Xcelsius files in Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise8

2. Click Enterprise.The Log On to BusinessObjects Enterprise dialog box appears.

3. Enter your logon information.a. In the System field, type the name of the Central Management

Server (CMS) where you want to save the XLF file.The CMS stores information about the objects saved to the Enterprise system. For more information about the CMS, refer to the BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server guides.

b. In the User name and Password fields, type your logon credentials.c. On the Authentication list, click the appropriate authentication type.If you are unsure of your logon information, contact your system administrator.

4. Click OK. 5. Select the folder where you want to save the XLF file, enter a file name,

and click Save.Tip: To add a folder to the CMS, click New Folder.

Opening XLF files from an Enterprise folderWhen an XLF file is saved to an Enterprise folder in BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server, it can also be opened from that location.

To open an XLF file from an Enterprise folder1. In Crystal Xcelsius Designer, on the File menu, click Open.

The Open dialog box appears.2. Click Enterprise.

The Log on to BusinessObjects Enterprise dialog box appears.3. Enter your logon information.

a. In the System field, type the name of the Central Management Server (CMS) that you want to open the XLF file from.The CMS stores information about the objects saved to the Enterprise system. For more information about the CMS, refer to the BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server guides.

b. In the User name and Password fields, type your logon credentials.c. On the Authentication list, click the appropriate authentication type.If you are unsure of your logon information, contact your system administrator.

138 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 139: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesStoring Xcelsius files in Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise 8

4. Click OK.When you have successfully logged on to your Enterprise system, the folder structure of your Enterprise system appears in the Open dialog box.

5. Select the folder that contains the XLF file you want to open, and click Open.The XLF file opens in Crystal Xcelsius Designer.

Exporting SWF files to an Enterprise folderYou can export a SWF file generated within Crystal Xcelsius Designer to a folder in BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server.

To export a SWF file to an Enterprise folder1. In Crystal Xcelsius Designer, open the XLF file.2. On the File menu, point to Export, and click BusinessObjects

Enterprise.Crystal Xcelsius Designer automatically generates a SWF file using the XLF file.The Log On to BusinessObjects Enterprise dialog box appears.

3. Enter your logon information.a. In the System field, type the name of the Central Management

Server (CMS) that you want to export the SWF file to.The CMS stores information about the objects saved to the Enterprise system. For more information about the CMS, refer to the BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server guides.

b. In the User name and Password fields, type your logon credentials.c. On the Authentication list, click the appropriate authentication type.If you are unsure of your logon information, contact your system administrator.

4. Click OK. The Save As dialog box appears and displays the folder structure of the Enterprise repository.

5. Select the folder that you want to export the SWF file to, enter a file name, and click Save.The SWF file is exported to the Enterprise repository.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 139

Page 140: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesManaging Crystal Xcelsius files in Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise8

Managing Crystal Xcelsius files in Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise

The Enterprise system allows you to manage Crystal Xcelsius files through InfoView and the Central Management Console (CMC). You can perform the following tasks with XLF and SWF files in InfoView:• View a list of your XLF and SWF files.• Search for specific files.• Move or copy files to different folders.• View and refresh SWF files in InfoView.If you have administrative rights to the Enterprise system, you can modify the edit and view rights for XLF and SWF files within the Central Management Console (CMC).Note: You cannot view XLF files in InfoView. To view XLF files that have been added to the Enterprise system, you must open the XLF file within Crystal Xcelsius Designer. For more information, see “Opening XLF files from an Enterprise folder” on page 138.

Viewing SWF files in InfoViewThe process for viewing a SWF file in InfoView is the same as the process for viewing other file types in BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server.

To view a SWF file in InfoView1. To launch InfoView, open your web browser and enter one of the

following paths depending on your Enterprise deployment:• .NET

http://webserver/businessobjects/enterprise115/

• Javahttp://webserver:portnumber/businessobjects/

enterprise115/desktoplaunch

Here, webserver represents the name of the web server, and portnumber represents the connection port.The CMS stores information about the objects saved to the Enterprise system. For more information about the CMS, refer to the BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server guides.

140 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 141: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesManaging Crystal Xcelsius files in Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise 8

Tip: If you have Enterprise installed on your machine, you can also access InfoView on the Start menu. Click Start > Programs > Business Objects > BusinessObjects Enterprise. Click either .NET InfoView or Java InfoView depending on your Enterprise deployment.

2. Enter your logon information.a. In the System field, type the name of the Central Management

Server (CMS) that the SWF file is saved to.b. In the User name and Password fields, type your logon credentials.c. On the Authentication list, click the appropriate authentication type.If you are unsure of your logon information, contact your system administrator.

3. Click Log On.4. Go to the folder that contains the SWF file you want to view.5. Click the name of the SWF file.

The SWF opens inside the InfoView panel.

Refreshing SWF files in InfoViewIn InfoView, users can refresh a Live Office-enabled SWF file to view the newest data.When you design the Xcelsius Visualization in Crystal Xcelsius Designer, you can set the Xcelsius Visualization file to refresh in InfoView in one of the following ways:• Refresh on Load• Refresh on Interval• Manual Refresh• Refresh based on Trigger BehaviorIf you are unsure of how the data in the SWF file refreshes, check the LiveOffice Connector settings in the XLF file in Crystal Xcelsius Designer.

To check the LiveOffice Connector refresh setting1. In Crystal Xcelsius Designer, open the XLF file.2. Double-click the LiveOffice Connector component to open its Properties

panel.3. On the Behavior tab, ensure the refresh setting that you want has been

selected and configured.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 141

Page 142: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesManaging Crystal Xcelsius files in Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise8

Refresh on Load

If you selected Refresh on Load when you configured the LiveOffice Connector component in Crystal Xcelsius Designer, the file automatically refreshes when you view it.

To refresh a SWF file on load1. Ensure that you have a Live Office-enabled SWF file saved to Enterprise

that has its refresh option set to Refresh on Load.2. Open InfoView and find the SWF file you want to view.

For more information, see “Viewing SWF files in InfoView” on page 140.3. Open the SWF file.

The SWF file is refreshed with the newest data from the data source.

Refresh on IntervalIf you selected Refresh on Interval when you configured the LiveOffice Connector component in Crystal Xcelsius Designer, the file refreshes at the interval you selected.

To refresh a SWF file on interval1. Ensure that you have a Live Office-enabled SWF file saved to Enterprise

that has its refresh option set to Refresh on Interval.2. Open InfoView and find the SWF file you want to view.

For more information, see “Viewing SWF files in InfoView” on page 140.3. Open the SWF file.

The SWF file automatically refreshed after the set number of seconds has passed.

Manual refreshIf you did not select any refresh option when you configured the LiveOffice Connector component in Crystal Xcelsius Designer, you must click the LiveOffice Connector button to refresh the file.

To manually refresh a SWF file1. Ensure that you have a Live Office-enabled SWF file saved to Enterprise

that has the LiveOffice Connector button configured to trigger the refresh.2. Open InfoView and find the SWF file you want to view.

For more information, see “Viewing SWF files in InfoView” on page 140.

142 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 143: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesManaging Crystal Xcelsius files in Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise 8

3. Open the SWF file and click the LiveOffice Connector button.Note: This button may have been renamed when the SWF file was created.When the LiveOffice Connector button is clicked, the Xcelsius file is refreshed with the newest data from the data source.

Refresh based on Trigger BehaviorIf you passed a Crystal Reports parameter to the Xcelsius Visualization, and used the features in the Trigger Behavior area to configure the refresh option, the data refreshes when the parameter value changes in the trigger cell that you specified. To refresh a SWF file based on trigger behavior

1. Ensure that you have a Live Office-enabled SWF file saved to Enterprise with the following characteristics:• A Single Value component configured to trigger the refresh.• A LiveOffice Connector component configured to refresh based on

the settings in the Trigger Behavior area.2. Open InfoView and find the SWF file you want to view.

For information on how to do this, see “Viewing SWF files in InfoView” on page 140.

3. Open the SWF file and change the value on the Single Value component.The data is refreshed and the new value or values are reflected in the file.

Refreshing Xcelsius visualizations outside InfoViewIf you are outside of InfoView and you have a connection to the Enterprise system, you can still refresh an Xcelsius Visualization against the newest data.

To refresh an Xcelsius Visualization outside InfoView1. Ensure that you have a Live Office-enabled Xcelsius Visualization.2. Open the Xcelsius Visualization and click the LiveOffice Connector button.

This button may have been renamed when the Visualization was created.The Log On to BusinessObjects Enterprise dialog box appears.

3. Enter your logon information.a. In the System field, type the name of the Central Management

Server (CMS) where you want to save the XLF file.The CMS stores information about the objects saved to the Enterprise system. For more information about the CMS, refer to the BusinessObjects Enterprise or Crystal Reports Server guides.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 143

Page 144: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesManaging Crystal Xcelsius files in Crystal Reports Server or BusinessObjects Enterprise8

b. In the User name and Password fields, type your logon credentials.c. On the Authentication list, click the appropriate authentication type.If you are unsure of your logon information, contact your system administrator.

4. Click OK. The Xcelsius Visualization is refreshed with the newest data from the data source.

Modifying edit and view rights in the Central Management Console

If you have administrative rights to the Enterprise system, you can modify the edit and view rights of XLF and SWF files in the Central Management Console (CMC).For more information about rights and how they work, refer to the BusinessObjects Enterprise Administration Guide.

To modify rights in the CMC1. To launch the CMC, open your web browser and enter one of the

following paths depending on your Enterprise deployment:• .NET

http://webserver/businessobjects/enterprise115/WebTools/adminlaunch/default.aspx

• Javahttp://webserver:portnumber/businessobjects/

enterprise115/adminlaunch/launchpad.html

Here, webserver represents the name of the web server, and portnumber represents the connection port.Tip: If you have Enterprise installed on your machine, you can also access InfoView on the Start menu. Click Start > Programs > Business Objects > BusinessObjects Enterprise. Click either .NET Administration Launchpad or Java Administration Launchpad depending on your Enterprise deployment.

2. Click Central Management Console.3. On the CMC Log On page, enter your logon information.

a. In the System field, type the name of the CMS where the XLF or SWF file is stored.

144 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 145: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesUpdating LiveOffice Connector settings after system migration 8

b. In the User name and Password fields, type your logon credentials.c. On the Authentication list, click the appropriate authentication type.

4. Click Log On.5. On the CMC home page, click Objects.

A list of all the objects on the CMS appears.6. Click the XLF or SWF file you want.7. Click the Rights tab.8. Use the lists under Access Level to set the rights for each user group.9. When you have finished, click Update to submit the changes that you

have made.

Updating LiveOffice Connector settings after system migration

When content is migrated from one BusinessObjects Enterprise system to another, the location of the Live Office Web Services changes. Therefore, the setting in the Properties Panel of the LiveOffice connector becomes incorrect and Live Office-enabled visualizations cannot be refreshed.You can update the web.config file or web.xml file directly to update the Live Office Web Services location without having to open each individual visualization.Note: Editing the web.config or web.xml file incorrectly can lead to unexpected behavior. Ensure you backup your files before making any changes to them.

To update the web.config file for .NET InfoView1. Locate web.config by going to

<drive>:\Program Files\Business Objects\BusinessObjects Enterprise 11.5\Web Content\Enterprise115\InfoView\web.config

2. Open web.config in a text editor such as Notepad.3. Search for the following text at the end of file:

<appSettings><add key="applications" value="com.businessobjects.

encyclopedia.reportviewer.wrapper.InfoViewPanel, analyticwrapper"/>

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 145

Page 146: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius Designer Integration FeaturesUpdating LiveOffice Connector settings after system migration8

4. When you find this text, add the following text below it:<add key="webConnectorUrl" value="http://

webservice:port/dswsbobje/services/session"></add>

Where webservice represents the name of your web service and port represents the port number that the web server communicates on.

This setting overrides the setting that is in Crystal Xcelsius.

To update the web.xml file for Java InfoView1. Locate web.xml by going to:

C:\Program Files\Business Objects\web server\webapps\ businessobjects\enterprise115\desktoplaunch\WEB-INF\web.xml

Where web server is the name of your web server.2. Open web.xml in a text editor such as Notepad.3. Search for the following text at the end of file:

<context-param><param-name>crystalxcelsius.webconnectorurl</param-name>

4. When you find this text, add the following text below it:<param-value>http://webservice:port/dswsbobje/services/

session</param-value>

Where webservice represents the name of your web service and port represents the port number that the web server communicates on.

This setting overrides the setting that is in Crystal Xcelsius.

146 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 147: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Frequently Asked Questions

chapter

Page 148: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Frequently Asked QuestionsInstallation questions9

Installation questions

Do I need to install Macromedia Flash to use Crystal Xcelsius?The Macromedia Flash player is required for Crystal Xcelsius to function properly. If you did not install Macromedia Flash as part of the installation process, you can download and install Flash from the Macromedia web site http://www.macromedia.com.

Why doesn't Crystal Xcelsius function after I upgrade or install Microsoft Office?

When Crystal Xcelsius is installed, it automatically configures itself to work with the version of Microsoft Office that is installed. If you upgrade or change the version of Microsoft Office on your machine, Crystal Xcelsius must be re-installed to work properly with the new version.

Microsoft Excel questions

Can I re-import an Excel file with a renamed spreadsheet?See “Re-importing with renamed sheets” on page 37 for information about renamed spreadsheets.

Why does my table look different than my Excel spreadsheet?The Table component only supports the Verdana font. Your Excel spreadsheets may be using a different font which will result in minor visual differences between the spreadsheet and your tables. To match your views, change the spreadsheet font to Verdana.

What happened to my cell formatting when I replaced Data Selection?

Replace Data Selection does not change the cell format. Please see “Updating data for a visualization” on page 36 for more information.

148 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 149: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Frequently Asked QuestionsMicrosoft PowerPoint questions 9

Microsoft PowerPoint questions

How can I embed an Crystal Xcelsius SWF file into an existing PowerPoint presentation?

Within Crystal Xcelsius you can embed your current SWF file into a new PowerPoint presentation using the Export to PowerPoint options. See “Exporting your visualization to PowerPoint” on page 111 for more information.

Troubleshooting questions

Why doesn't my component show scientific formatting?The visual display of scientific formatted numbers is not supported at this time. Calculations that are dependent upon scientific formatted numbers are not affected.

Why doesn’t my URL button work?Your URL must include http:// for it to function correctly.

What happened to the scenarios I saved?If you are having trouble saving and loading scenarios with the Scenario button, refer to “How does the local scenario buttons component work?” on page 65.

Why can't I drag my Slider, Dial, or other single value component?

The values of single value components that are linked to cells with formulas cannot be adjusted. This prevents inconsistencies in the visualization.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 149

Page 150: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Frequently Asked QuestionsTroubleshooting questions9

Why aren't my Use Web Service visualizations refreshing when they are opened in Internet Explorer?

Internet Explorer has default cache settings that prevent Crystal Xcelsius visualizations from refreshing properly. Please see “Internet Explorer caching issues” on page 82 for more information.

Why won't my SWF file print correctly?Printing your SWF file through the menu of the Flash Player does not work because the Flash Player does not print transparent objects properly. Printing through the browser may also print the SWF file with incorrect proportions.

To correctly print your SWF file1. Take a screen shot of the SWF file.

Tip: Press the CTRL and PRINTSCREEN keys simultaneously to capture the full screen or ALT and PRINTSCREEN to capture the active window.

2. Paste the screen shot into an image program.3. Print through that program's print options.

Why do I receive a Server Busy message?The Server Busy message means that Excel has a pending operation or is busy performing an instruction. Check Excel to make sure it is not in the process of editing and then click Retry on the warning dialog box.

Why do I receive the message “A script in this movie is causing Flash Player to run slowly...”?

The Macromedia Flash Player used to view Crystal Xcelsius visualizations displays this message when a script has taken more than 60 seconds to run. Due to the complexity of Crystal Xcelsius visualizations, larger visualizations running on slow machines may cause this message to be shown, particularly at startup. If you click No on the message dialog box, the visualization should load properly. Note: While in Preview Mode, pressing Yes to abort the script causes the preview to stop working. You will need to switch to Design Mode, then back to Preview Mode, to properly preview the visualization.

150 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 151: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Frequently Asked QuestionsTroubleshooting questions 9

Why does my visualization start in a strange state?When a visualization is loaded, all selectors insert their default selection data into their Insert In ranges to populate other components with data. When more than one selector inserts into the same range, the selector at the highest level inserts last. This overrides the default data inserted by the other selectors.You can use the Object Browser to view the order of the components and change the order using the Layer Options.

Why are my data sources not refreshing?Certain data sources are denoted as static with a green Excel icon. These data sources do not refresh during the course of the visualization. Please see “Dynamic and static data sources” on page 30.

Why are formula-based indexes for my VLOOKUP array not changing at runtime?

To maintain the speed and efficiency of the VLOOKUP function, Crystal Xcelsius does not recalculate formulas in the index column of a VLOOKUP array.If you have a VLOOKUP function that contains a formula in the index column, the index column cell always contains the initial value of the formula.

Why are my URL-based images not visible in preview mode?

Relative pathsURL references to images that are relative paths do not display in preview mode because the preview SWF file is generated in a temporary directory. When you export the SWF file to a location that will make the relative paths valid, the images will load properly.

Jpeg files on a web siteIf you are referencing jpeg files on a web site, be sure that the jpeg files are not progressive jpegs. Progressive jpegs load in stages, which allows low-bandwidth users to see an image quickly and without having to wait for the entire image to load.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 151

Page 152: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Frequently Asked QuestionsQuestions about supported features9

Crystal Xcelsius cannot display progressive jpegs that are referenced by a URL. If you select the embed option when you reference a progressive jpeg, Crystal Xcelsius displays the progressive jpeg as expected.

Why am I getting a Truncation Occurred... message when I try to preview my visualization?

Crystal Xcelsius has a default value for the maximum number of rows that can be referenced in either a formula or source data for a component. If you are getting the Truncation Occurred... message when you click preview, your visualization contains a function that has a reference to an array of cells that exceeds the maximum number of rows setting. You can change this setting with the Maximum Rows setting on the Data menu. The Maximum Rows setting exists to help ensure optimal performance of Crystal Xcelsius visualizations.

Why are my international settings not used by my XLF?An XLF uses the international settings of the machine it was created on until the spreadsheet is re-imported into the XLF. These settings include items such as the decimal and thousands separator characters.

Questions about supported features

What Excel functions are supported by Crystal Xcelsius?See “Supported Excel Functions” on page 298 of the online reference guide (on your Crystal Xcelsius installation disk) for a complete list of functions.

What is the maximum limit of rows for a single spreadsheet selection?

There is no limit to the number of rows for a selection. However, the size of your selection can affect the performance of your visualization. Crystal Xcelsius warns you if you select more than 512 rows.

152 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 153: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Frequently Asked QuestionsQuestions about supported features 9

Does Crystal Xcelsius support Excel files that link to other Excel files?

No, this feature is not supported by Crystal Xcelsius.

How large can my Excel file be?There is no limit to the size of an Excel spreadsheet that can be used in Crystal Xcelsius. There are a number of factors, however, which may affect the performance of your visualization. These include:• the number of components you have on the canvas• the amount of data that is being changed during the simulation• the complexity of the calculations being performedThe speed of the computer can also greatly affect performance, and should be kept in mind when developing visualizations that will be distributed to other users.

Which regional Excel formats does Crystal Xcelsius support?Crystal Xcelsius automatically detects the regional formatting being used on your machine and adjusts its output appropriately. For example, if your regional settings use / for the date separator, the date January 2nd 2004 appears as 1/2/04 in your Crystal Xcelsius visualizations. If your regional settings use - for the date separator, the date appears as 1-2-04 in the exported visualization. These settings can be found under the Regional and Language Options of the Windows Control Panel. The following items are automatically adjusted: • decimal separator • thousands separator • general format name • month • day • year • hour • minute • second • time separator • date separator

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 153

Page 154: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Frequently Asked QuestionsQuestions about supported features9

Which non-standard characters are supported?

The following non-standard characters are supported at this time:

Why don’t my Excel macros work?Crystal Xcelsius does not support macros in Excel spreadsheets at this time.

Ç

ü

é

â

ä

à

å

ç

ë

è

ï

î

ì

Ä

Å

É

æ

Æ

ô

ö

ò

û

ù

Ö

Ü

á

í

ó

ú

ñ

Ñ

ß

154 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 155: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

General Features Reference

chapter

Page 156: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

General Features ReferenceOverview10

Overview

This chapter discusses Properties panel features that are common to most components. Depending on the component that you are working with, some of these features may be unavailable.

Common areasThe areas described in this section are common to most components, and always contain the same features.

Font settingsThe Font Settings area lets you customize font properties for a component.

FontThe font box displays the name of the font. By default, the font for all components is set to Verdana. If you chose to use non-embedded fonts in the visualization, you can use the font box to change the font for the component. For information about changing the font, see “Using Font Options” on page 25.

SizeTo set the font size, select or type a number from 8 to 72 in the size box.

BoldClick the bold button to make the text bold.

ItalicClick the italic button to italicize the text.

UnderlineClick the underline button to underline the text.

ColorClick the Color Selector button to customize the font color. For information on Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

156 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 157: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

General Features ReferenceCommon areas 10

Dynamic VisibilityThe Dynamic Visibility area appears on the Behavior tab. The features in the Dynamic Visibility area control the visibility behavior of the component.

Display StatusThe Display Status Cell Selector button lets you select an empty cell in the imported spreadsheet to control the visibility of the component. When the user makes a selection, a variable corresponding to that selection is inserted into the empty cell. For more information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: Do not link Display Status to a cell or range of cells already linked within the same component or one of your data sources will not refresh if it is changed dynamically.

Display Status KeyThe Display Status Key Cell Selector button lets you specify the values that the Display Status variable must match for the component to become visible. For more information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Entry EffectThe items on the Entry Effect list determine the visual effect a component has when it appears:• None

The component has no entry effect.• Fade-in

The component appears in a semi-transparent state and gradually becomes solid.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 157

Page 158: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

General Features ReferenceCommon boxes10

• GrowThe component appears gradually until it reaches its full size.

• Grow X FirstThe component appears gradually, first reaching its full width, and then reaching its full height.

Effect DurationThe Effect Duration box is available only if you clicked Fade-in, Grow, or Grow X First on the Entry Effect list, and lets you determine how long the entry effect lasts. You can enter a value from 0 to 10, with 0 being the shortest duration, and 10 being the longest duration.

Common boxes

TransparencyThe Transparency box lets you set the transparency value for a part of a component. You can enter a value from 0 to 100, with 0 being completely transparent, and 100 being completely solid.

WeightThe Weight box determines how thick a line is. You can enter a value from 0 to 100, with 0 being the thinnest line, and 100 being the thickest line.

X ShiftThe X Shift box lets you shift text left or right relative to the position you specified in the Position list. To enter the X shift value, type a numerical value in the X Shift box, or use the up and down arrows adjacent to the X Shift box. Negative values shift the title left; positive values shift the title right.

158 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 159: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

General Features ReferenceCommon lists 10

Y ShiftThe Y Shift box lets you shift text up or down relative to the position you specified in the Position list. To enter the Y shift value, type a numerical value in the Y Shift box, or use the up and down arrows adjacent to the Y Shift box. Negative values shift the title downward; positive values shift the title upward.

Common lists

PositionThe Position list lets you specify the position of text. Depending on the component that you are working with, some of the items on the Position list may be unavailable:• Top Center• Top Left• Top Right• Left• Right• Center• Bottom Left• Bottom Center• Bottom Right

AlignmentClick one of these items on the Alignment list to determine the alignment of text:• Left• Center• Right

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 159

Page 160: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

General Features ReferenceCommon lists10

Numeric Format

The Numeric Format list lets you apply predefined formats to numerical data displayed in the Xcelsius Visualization. Some of the formats on the Numeric Format list provide more options for customizing the appearance of numerical data.

GeneralThe General format displays numeric data as it appears. This format has no additional options for customization.

NumericThe Numeric format provides more options for customizing the format of numeric values.

Negative ValuesThe Negative Values list lets you select a format for negative values:• Minus Sign Prefix• Red Text• Parenthesis• Red Text with Parenthesis

Decimal PlacesThe Decimal Places box lets you enter the number of decimal places to display. You can enter a value from 0 to 20.

Use 1000 SeparatorWhen you select the Use 1000 Separator check box, Xcelsius inserts commas into numerical values above 1000.

CurrencyThe Currency format provides more options for customizing the format of currency values.

Negative ValuesSee “Numeric” on page 160.

Decimal PlacesSee “Numeric” on page 160.

160 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 161: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

General Features ReferenceCommon lists 10

PrefixWhen you select the Prefix check box, Xcelsius precedes currency values with a symbol. This symbol is set to “$” by default. To change the default symbol, enter the desired symbol in the adjacent Prefix box. The Prefix box is available only when you select the Prefix check box.

SuffixWhen you select the Suffix check box, Xcelsius adds a symbol to the end of currency values. Enter the desired symbol in the adjacent Suffix box. The Suffix box is available only when you select the Suffix check box.

PercentThe Percent format provides one option for customizing the appearance of percentage values.

Decimal PlacesSee “Numeric” on page 160.

DateThe Date format provides one option for formatting dates in the Xcelsius Visualization.

Type Select the desired date format from the Type list.

TimeThe Time format provides one option for formatting times in the Xcelsius Visualization.

TypeSelect the desired time format from the Type list.

TextThe Text format displays numerical values as plain text. This format has no additional options for customization.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 161

Page 162: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

General Features ReferenceCommon buttons10

From Spreadsheet

The From Spreadsheet format lets you keep numeric formats in the imported spreadsheet that are not supported by Xcelsius. When you click From Spreadsheet, the format string appears in the Format String box.

Common buttonsThe buttons described in this section appear on the Properties panels for most components.

Cell Selector buttonThe Cell Selector button lets you select a cell or a cell range in the imported spreadsheet and link the Xcelsius Visualization to various data values. The different types of Cell Selector buttons are as follows:• Dynamic Data

A Dynamic Data Cell Selector button lets you select cells with dynamic data. When the Xcelsius Visualization is refreshed, changes to the values in Dynamic Data cells will be reflected in the Xcelsius Visualization.

• Static DataA Static Data Cell Selector button lets you select cells with static data. When the Xcelsius Visualization is refreshed, no change occurs to the values in Static Data cells.

When you click a Cell Selector button, the imported spreadsheet appears. Draw a box around the cell or cells you wish to select. The location number of the selected cell or cells appears in the Select a Range dialog box.To return to the Properties panel, click OK in the Select a Range dialog box. The location number of the selected cell or cells appears in the box adjacent to the Cell Selector button.

Color Selector buttonThe Color Selector button lets you select a custom color for part of the component.When you click a Color Selector button, the Color dialog box appears. Select the desired color from the palette, or click Define Custom Colors to choose another color. When you are finished, click OK to return to the Properties panel.

162 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 163: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

General Features ReferenceCommon Alerts Tab features 10

Browse buttonThe Browse button lets you manually enter values for a component instead of selecting the values in the imported spreadsheet. When you click the Browse button, a dialog box appears. In the dialog box, type the values directly into the cells. When you are finished, click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Properties panel.

Information buttonThe Information button provides information about how a set of features on the Properties panel works together. When you click the Information button, a new window opens, and an animated movie guides you through the way one or more features work. You can go to different pages in the movie, and click play or pause to find the information you need. When you are finished, close the window to return to the Properties panel.

Common Alerts Tab featuresAlerts let the user know that a predefined value has been reached. The features on the Alerts tab control how alerts behave for a component when the Xcelsius Visualization is run in its interactive format. Depending on the component that you are working with, some of the features described in this section may be unavailable.

Enable AlertsThe Enable Alerts check box controls whether alerts are enabled for the component.

Alert MethodYou can click one of the following options in the Alert Method area to define the alert method for the component:• Value Alerts

The alerts use values that you specify in the imported spreadsheet.• Percent Alerts

The alerts use percentages that you specify using the Alert Levels slider.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 163

Page 164: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

General Features ReferenceCommon Alerts Tab features10

Alert Definition

You can click one of the following options in the Alert Definition area to define the ideal value type for the component:• Low Values are Good

Use this option when the ideal value type is lower than the target value. For example, select Low Values are Good when you set alerts for expenses, and you want the expense values to be as low as possible.

• High Values are GoodUse this option when the ideal value type is higher than the target value. For example, select High values are Good when you set alerts for revenue, and you want the revenue values to be as high as possible.

• Middle Values are GoodMiddle values are Good is unavailable if you clicked Value Alerts in the Alert Method area. Use this option when the ideal value type is as close as possible to the target value. For example, select Middle Values are Good when you set alerts for inventory, and you want the inventory quantities to be as accurate as possible

Alert VariableThe Alert Variable list is available for multi-variable components only, and lets you specify whether you want to use X-axis values or Y-axis values to trigger alerts.

Value LevelsValue Levels appears only if you clicked Value Alerts. You can specify the value levels for alerts in two ways:• If you want to select value levels from the imported spreadsheet, click the

Value Levels Cell Selector button. For information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

• If you want to enter value levels manually, click the Value Levels Browse button. For information on Browse buttons, see “Browse button” on page 163.

164 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 165: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

General Features ReferenceCommon Alerts Tab features 10

Number of ColorsThe Number of Colors box appears only if you clicked Percent Alerts, and lets you specify the number of alert colors. To change the number of alert colors, use the up and down arrows adjacent to the Number of Colors box. You can have 2 to 10 alert colors.

Control Panel LimitsThe Control Panel Limits button appears only if you clicked Percent Alerts. When you click the Control Panel Limits button, the Control Panel Limits dialog box appears and lets you set the maximum and minimum percentage values.

Alert Levels Color ScaleIf you clicked Percent Alerts, the Alert Levels color scale lets you specify the percentages that will trigger the alert colors. To specify these percentages, drag the gray pointers above the color scale until the percentages that you want appear below the color scale.

If you clicked Value Alerts, the colors in the Alert Levels color scale represent the values you specified in Value Levels.

Fill ColorThe Color Selector button adjacent to Fill Color lets you customize the fill colors for different alert levels. To customize an alert color, click the color you wish to customize on the Alert Levels color scale. The Color Selector button becomes active for that color. For information on Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Font ColorFont Color is available only if you selected Enable Value Alerts. The Color Selector button adjacent to Font Color lets you customize the color of the font used to display value alerts. For information on Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 165

Page 166: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

General Features ReferenceCommon Alerts Tab features10

No Data Color

The Color Selector button adjacent to No Data Color lets you customize the alert color for parts of the component which have no data. For information on Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Alert Level DisplayThe three check boxes in the Alert Level Display area let you customize how alerts are displayed:• Enable Object Alerts

The Enable Object Alerts check box controls whether the alert colors for the component can be displayed.

• Enable Value AlertsThe Enable Value Alerts check box controls the visibility of a value that is displayed in an alert color box.

• Enable Alert Level DisplayThe Enable Alert Level Display check box controls whether the component displays all alert colors and the value ranges they represent.

Note: The Alert Level Display area is available for most single value components, and is unavailable for all other components.

TargetYou can specify the target value by typing the numerical value in the Target box. This method works best for single value components.Alternatively, you can use the Target Cell Selector button to select the target data in the imported spreadsheet. This method works best for chart components. For information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

166 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 167: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Chart Components Reference

chapter

Page 168: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceOverview11

Overview

This chapter discusses the Properties panel features for the components in the Charts folder.

General tabCommon to all Chart components

Data RangeThe options in this area select a range of Excel data that contains all of the data for the selected chart.

Data RangeClick Data Range to enable the options in this area.Click the adjacent cell selector button to select a range of data from the spreadsheet.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Series InThis option controls the format in which the series information is contained. The following options are available:• Rows

Click this option to indicate that the series information is contained in the rows of the selected range.

• ColumnsClick this option to indicate that the series information is contained in the columns of the selected range.

SeriesThe options in this area edit individual series data for the components.The Name, X Values, and Y Values parameters all apply to the series name that is selected, indicated by a blue highlight, in the Series box.

SeriesClick Series to enable the options in this section.Click a series in the list box to edit the data for that series.

168 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 169: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceGeneral tab 11

AddClick Add to add a new series to the chart.

RemoveClick Remove to remove a series from the chart. The series that is selected in the Series box will be removed.

NameType in the Name box or click the adjacent cell selector button to set the name of the selected series.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

X ValuesClick the cell selector button adjacent to the X Values box to select the x values for the selected series.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option does not apply to the OHLC or Candlestick Chart components.

Y ValuesClick the cell selector button adjacent to the Y Values box to select the y values for the selected series.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the Bubble and XY Chart components.

SizesClick the cell selector button adjacent to the Sizes box to set the size value for the selected series.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the Bubble Chart component.

OpenClick the cell selector button adjacent to the Open box to select the open value for the series.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 169

Page 170: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceGeneral tab11

For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the OHLC and Candlestick Chart components.

HighClick the cell selector button adjacent to the High box to select the high value for the series.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the OHLC and Candlestick Chart components.

LowClick the cell selector button adjacent to the Low box to select the low value for the series.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the OHLC and Candlestick Chart components.

CloseClick the cell selector button adjacent to the Close box to select the close value for the series.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the OHLC and Candlestick Chart components.

Category Axis LabelsClick the cell selector button adjacent to the Category Axis Labels box to select the category axis labels for the selected series.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

TitlesThe options in this area set the various titles for the selected chart component.

Chart titleType in the Chart Title box or click the adjacent cell selector button to set the title for the component.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

170 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 171: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceDrill Down tab 11

Chart subtitleType in the Chart Subtitle box or click the adjacent cell selector button to set the subtitle for the component.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Category (X) Axis TitleType in the Category (X) Axis Title box or click the adjacent cell selector button to set the X-axis title for the component.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Value (Y) Axis TitleType in the Value (Y) Axis Title box or click the adjacent cell selector button to set the Y-axis title for the component.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Drill Down tab

Common to most Chart components

Enable Drill DownClick Enable Drill down to enable the options on this tab.Note: • This tab does not apply to the Area, Stacked Area, Radar, and Filled

Radar Chart components.• The options on this tab are available only if a series has been added to

the component on the General Tab.

Chart Drill-Down OptionsThe options in this area define how the Chart component will behave when a selection is made. The following options are available:• Insert Series In

Click the Insert Series In cell selector button to select the cell into which the currently selected series name is inserted. For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 171

Page 172: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceDrill Down tab11

• Insert ValueClick an option on the Insert Value list to determine the structure of the data that is inserted when a selection is made. The following options are available:• Position

A target cell is linked to the Chart component. When a selection is made on the Chart component the position value of the selection is entered in the target cell.

• ValueA target cell is linked to the Chart component. When a selection is made on the Chart component the source data value of the selection is entered in the target cell.

• RowsA target row is linked to the Chart component. When a selection is made on the Chart component the row of source data values of the selection are entered in the target row.

• ColumnsA target column is linked to the Chart component. When a selection is made on the Chart component the column of source data values of the selection are entered in the target column.

• Status ListA target range of cells is linked to the Chart component. When a selection is made on the Chart component a value of 1 is entered in the target cell in the range representing that selection and a value of 0 is entered in the other cells in the range

• SeriesClick an option from the Series list to select the series for which you want to configure. All series for the chart must be configured individually.

• Insert Value InClick the cell selector button adjacent to the Insert Value In box to select the cells into which the selected data is inserted. For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

172 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 173: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceDrill Down tab 11

• Select VariableClick an option from the Select Variable list to determine the dimension of data that you would like inserted. The following options are available:• X Values

This option is available for chart components with X and Y dimensions. The X values of the source data are inserted.

• Y ValuesThis option is available for chart components with X and Y dimensions. The Y values of the source data are inserted.

• OpenThis option is available for the OHLC Chart and Candlestick Chart components only. The values from the open dimension of the source data are inserted.

• HighThis option is available for the OHLC Chart and Candlestick Chart components only. The values from the high dimension of the source data are inserted.

• LowThis option is available for the OHLC Chart and Candlestick Chart components only. The values from the low dimension of the source data are inserted.

• CloseThis option is available for the OHLC Chart and Candlestick Chart components only. The values from the close dimension of the source data are selected.

• SizeThis option is available for the Bubble Chart component only. The values from the size dimension of the source data are selected.

Note: The Select Variable list is enabled only when Value is selected on the Insert Value list.

• Source DataClick the cell selector button adjacent to the Source Data box to select the data that is inserted when a selection is made on the component.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option is enabled only when Rows or Columns is selected on the Insert Option list.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 173

Page 174: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceBehavior tab11

Drill-Down BehaviorThe option in this area defines how the component recognizes that a selection has been made.Click an option on the Update On list to define the recognition method of the component. The following options are available:• Mouse Click

The user must click on an item to select it. • Mouse Over

An item is selected when the pointer passes over it.

Default OptionsThe options in this area set the default status of the component. The following options are available:• Series

Click an option from the Series list to select the Series that will configure the default value.

• Default ValueClick a value from the Default Value list to select which element of the series will be selected by default when the Xcelsius Visualization is loaded. This option also determines which default data is inserted into the Insert Value In box when the Xcelsius Visualization is loaded.

Behavior tab

Common to all Chart components

Dynamic VisibilityFor information on the options available in the Dynamic Visibility area see “Dynamic Visibility” on page 157.

Range OptionsThe options in this area control how the chart handles range data.

Series: Ignore End BlanksClick Series: Ignore End Blanks to prevent all of the empty series past the last non-empty series from being displayed in the Chart component. This option allows a variable number of series to be displayed in the Chart component.

174 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 175: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceBehavior tab 11

Note: • Although the Chart component may not be displaying all of the data

within the Data range, the performance of the Xcelsius Visualization is affected by the size of the range.

• This option does not apply to the Pie Chart component.

Values: Ignore End Blanks Click Values: Ignore End Blanks to prevent all of the empty values past the last non-empty value from being displayed in the Chart component. This allows a variable amount of data to be displayed in the Chart component. Note: Although the Chart component may not be displaying all of the data within the Data range, the performance of the Xcelsius Visualization is affected by the size of the range.

Common to most Chart components

Scale BehaviorThe options in this area control how the chart axes scale as data changes.Note: The options in this area do not apply to the Pie Chart component.

Auto Zoom OutClick Auto Zoom Out to set the scaling behavior. The axis scale will only grow as data changes, and not shrink. This option is recommended when a chart will be used in an animation. Setting the scale to Auto Zoom Out minimizes chart rescaling.

Auto ScaleClick Auto Scale to set the scaling behavior. The axis scale will grow and shrink as data changes.

Manual ScaleClick Manual Scale to set the scaling behavior. The axis scale will not change as data changes. The minimum and maximum scale values are set at design time by the tool user.

Y-Axis Minimum ValueType in the Y-Axis Minimum Value box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select a value to restrict the minimum value that can be displayed on the Y axis of the Chart component.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 175

Page 176: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceBehavior tab11

For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option is enabled only when Manual Scale is selected.

Y-Axis Maximum ValueType in the Y-Axis Maximum Value box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select a value to restrict the maximum vale that can be displayed on the Y axis of the Chart component.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option is enabled only when Manual Scale is selected.

X-Axis Minimum ValueType in the X-Axis Minimum Value box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select a value to restrict the minimum value that can be displayed on the X axis of the Chart component.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option is enabled only when Manual Scale is selected.

X-Axis Maximum ValueType in the X-Axis Maximum Vale box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select a value to restrict the maximum value that can be displayed on the X axis of the Chart component.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option is enabled only when Manual Scale is selected.

Y-Axis ScaleClick an option on the Y-Axis Scale list to select the format of the Y Axis for the Chart component. The following options are available:• Linear

Click this option to plot the Y axis values on a linear scale. Values plotted on a linear scale appear at evenly spaced intervals in the chart component.

• LogarithmicClick this option to plot the Y axis values on a logarithmic scale. Values plotted on a logarithmic scale appear at unevenly spaced intervals in the chart component. Smaller values have larger space intervals; larger values have smaller space intervals. Equal percentage changes are represented by equal distances.

176 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 177: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceBehavior tab 11

X-Axis ScaleClick an option on the X-Axis Scale list to select the format of the X Axis for the Chart component. The following options are available:• Linear

Click this option to plot the X axis values on a linear scale. Values plotted on a linear scale appear at evenly spaced intervals in the chart component.

• LogarithmicClick this option to plot the X axis values on a logarithmic scale. Values plotted on a logarithmic scale appear at unevenly spaced intervals in the chart component. Smaller values have larger space intervals; larger values have smaller space intervals. Equal percentage changes are represented by equal distances.

Zoom Out SensitivityThis option tunes the scaling behavior for the Chart component. The Zoom Out Sensitivity setting determines how much an axis scale will grow as the data changes.Drag the slider to set the Zoom Out Sensitivity. To increase sensitivity, drag the slider to the right. Moving the slider to the extreme left results in the axis scale increasing by a small factor when the chart scale changes. Moving the slider to the extreme right results in the axis scale increasing by a large factor when the chart scale changes. Note: This option is enabled only when Auto Zoom Out is selected.

Fixed Label WidthClick Fixed Label Width to lock the width of the axes labels so they will not be resized if the scale changes.

Edit Label Unit AbbreviationsClick the Edit Label Unit Abbreviations Browse button to display the Label Unit Abbreviations dialog box.For information on the Browse button see “Browse button” on page 163.Note: This option is available only when Fixed Label Width is selected.

Label Unit Abbreviations dialog boxIn the Displayed Sign boxes edit the unit abbreviations that appear on the axes labels.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 177

Page 178: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceBehavior tab11

Animation

Note: The option in this section does not apply to the Area Chart and Stacked Area Chart components.

Animation EnabledClick Animation Enabled to add animation to the chart components when the visualization is run. In chart components with bars, the bars grow and shrink when the data changes and the visualization is run. In point-based chart components the points grow to full size when the visualization is run.

Run Time optionsThe options in this area control the configuration options that appear on the chart in the generated SWF file. These options let you modify the Scale Behavior area of Chart components at run time in the generated SWF file.

Show Focus ButtonClick Show Focus Button to display the focus button on the run time configuration menu. Clicking on the focus button forces the chart to rescale the chart axes based on the current data.

Show Reset Scale ButtonClick Show Reset Scale Button to display the reset button on the run time configuration menu. Clicking on the reset button forces the chart to rescale the chart axes to the scale that the chart had when it first loaded.

Show Scale Behavior OptionsClick Show Scale Behavior Options to display the scale behavior options on the run time configuration menu. Clicking on the scale behavior options changes the scaling behavior of the Chart component; the chart axes will scale based on the new setting the next time the chart data changes. The scale behavior options have the following options available: • Click On to set the scaling behavior to Auto Zoom Out.• Click Off to set the scaling behavior to Manual Scale.• Click Auto to set the scaling behavior to Auto Scale.Note: • If one or more of the run time options are enabled, the run time icon

appears on the chart in the generated SWF file.• When the pointer passes over the run time icon, all or part of the run time

menu will appear, depending on the options enabled.

178 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 179: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAlerts Tab 11

Alerts TabFor information on the features available on the Alerts Tab see “Common Alerts Tab features” on page 163.Note: The options on the Alerts Tab apply only to the Line, Column, Stacked Column, Bar, Stacked Bar, Combination, Bubble, XY, and Radar Chart components.

Appearance tab

Common to all Chart components

Titles buttonChart TitleThe options in this area configure the title area of the selected chart. The following options are available:• Show Title

Click Show Title to display the Title and Subtitle on the selected Chart component. Note: Show Title must be selected for the other options in this area to be enabled.

• Title Font SettingsFor information on Font Settings see “Font settings” on page 156.

• Subtitle Font SettingsFor information on Font Settings see “Font settings” on page 156.

• AlignmentClick an alignment format on the Alignment list to customize the Chart Title and Chart Subtitle. The following formats are available:• Left • Center• Right.

• Show BorderClick Show Border to display a border around the title area.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 179

Page 180: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab11

• Border ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Border Color to set the border color.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• Show FillClick Show Fill to display a background with a solid fill color behind the title area.

• Fill ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Fill Color to set the background fill color.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• WeightAdjust the value in the Weight box to control the width of the border.

LegendThe options in this area configure the legend area of the selected chart. The following options are available:• Show Legend

Click Show Legend to display a legend on the Chart component. Note: Show Legend must be selected for the other options in this area to be enabled.

• Legend Font SettingsFor information on Font Settings see “Font settings” on page 156.

• Show BorderClick Show Border to display a border around the legend area.

• Border ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Border Color to set the border color.For information on the color selector button see “Font settings” on page 156.

• Show FillClick Show Fill to display a background with a solid fill color behind the legend area.

180 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 181: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab 11

• Fill ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Fill Color to set the background fill color.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• WeightAdjust the value in the Border Weight box to control the width of the border.

• PlacementClick an option on the Placement list to set the location of the legend area on the Chart component. The following options are available:• Top• Left• Right• Bottom

• X ShiftFor information on X Shift see “X Shift” on page 158.

• Y ShiftFor information on Y Shift see “Y Shift” on page 159.

Layout buttonChart AreaThe options in this area configure the background and border appearance for the Chart component. The following options are available:• Show Background

Click Show Background to display a background behind the Chart component.

• Use Custom ColorClick Use Custom Color to enable the ability to customize color in the Chart Area.

• Background ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Background Color to customize the background color.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 181

Page 182: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab11

Plot AreaThe options in this area configure the plot area for the Chart component. The following options are available:• Show Border

Click Show Border to display a border around the plot area.• Border Color

Click the color selector button adjacent to Show Border to customize the border color. For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• Show FillClick Show Fill to display a background with a solid fill color behind the plot area.

• Fill ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Show Fill to set the background fill color.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• MarginAdjust the value in the Margin box to control the amount of space between the outer edges of the plot area and the outer edges of the chart area.

• WeightAdjust the value in the Weight box to customize the border weight.

• Use Major DivisionsClick Use Major Vertical Divisions to enable the Major Divisions options. This option controls the number of value labels displayed on the X axis. Type in the Use Major Divisions box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the value of major divisions that appear on the Chart component.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: • This option does not apply to the Pie Chart component.• This option is enabled only when the Manual is selected in the Scale

Behavior area on the Behavior Tab.

182 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 183: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab 11

• Use IntervalClick Use Interval to customize the interval of values displayed on the Y axis. Type in the Use Interval box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the value of the interval between values.For information on the cell selector button see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option does not apply to the Pie Chart component.

• Minor DivisionsAdjust the value in the Minor Division box to control the number of lines that appear between the major grid lines.

Note: This option does not apply to the Pie Chart component.

Horizontal GridlinesNote: The options in this area do not apply to the Pie Chart component.The options in this area control the display of horizontal grid lines in the plot area of the Chart component. The following options are available:• Major Gridlines

Click Major Gridlines to display major horizontal grid lines in the plot area of the Chart component.

• Major Gridlines ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Major Gridlines to customize the color of the major gridlines.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• Major Gridlines WeightAdjust the value in the Major Gridlines Weight box to customize the weight of the major gridlines.

• Minor GridlinesClick Minor Gridlines to display minor horizontal grid lines in the plot area of the Chart component.

• Minor Gridlines ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Minor Gridlines to customize the color of the minor gridlines. For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 183

Page 184: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab11

• Minor Gridlines WeightAdjust the value in the Minor Gridlines Weight box to customize the weight of the minor gridlines.

Vertical GridlinesNote: The options in this area do not apply to the Pie Chart Component.The options in this area control the display of vertical grid lines in the plot area of the Chart Component. The following options are available:• Major Gridlines

Click Major Gridlines to display major vertical grid lines in the plot area of the Chart component.

• Major Gridlines ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Major Gridlines to customize the color of the major gridlines.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• Major Gridlines WeightAdjust the value in the Major Gridlines Weight box to customize the weight of the major gridlines.

• Minor GridlinesClick Minor Gridlines to display minor vertical grid lines in the plot area of the Chart component.

• Minor Gridlines ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Minor Gridlines to customize the color of the minor gridlines. For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• Minor Gridlines WeightAdjust the value in the Minor Gridlines Weight box to customize the weight of the minor gridlines.

Common to most Chart components

Y Axis buttonNote: The options enabled by this button do not apply to the Pie Chart component. The buttons appear on the Appearance Tab for the Pie Chart component, but remain disabled.

184 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 185: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab 11

Vertical Axis TitleThe options in this area configure the vertical axis title for the Chart component. The following options are available:• Show Title

Click Show Title to display the Vertical Axis Title on the Chart component.• Title Font Settings

For information on Font Settings see “Font settings” on page 156.

Vertical AxisUse the options in this section to configure the appearance of the vertical axis• Show Axis

Click Show Axis to display the vertical axis for the Chart component.• Axis Color

Click the color selector button adjacent to Show Axis to set the axis color.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies to the vertical axis and tick marks.

• WeightAxis Weight controls the width of the axis. Adjust the value in the Weight box to set the axis width.Note: This option applies to the vertical axis and tick marks.

• Show Major TicksClick Show Major Ticks to display horizontal tick marks where the major grid lines intersect the vertical axis.Note: This option does not apply to the Bar Chart component.

• Show Minor TicksClick Show Minor Ticks to display horizontal tick marks where the minor grid lines intersect the vertical axis.Note: This option does not apply to the Bar Chart component.

Vertical Axis LabelsThe options in this area configure the appearance of the value labels displayed along the vertical axis. The following options are available:• Show Labels

Click Show Labels to display value labels on the vertical axis. The value labels appear where the major grid lines intersect the vertical axis.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 185

Page 186: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab11

• Font SettingsFor information on Font Settings see “Font settings” on page 156.

• Numeric FormatFor information on the Numeric Format list see “Numeric Format” on page 160.Note: This option does not apply to the Bar Chart component.

X Axis buttonNote: The options enabled by this button do not apply to the Pie Chart component. The buttons appear on the Appearance Tab for the Pie Chart component, but remain disabled.

Horizontal Axis TitleThe options in this area configure the horizontal axis title for the Chart component. The following options are available:• Show Title

Click Show Title to display the Horizontal Axis Title on the Chart component.• Title Font Settings

For information on Font Settings see “Font settings” on page 156.

Horizontal AxisThe options in this area configure the appearance of the horizontal axis. The following options are available:• Show Axis

Click Show Axis to display the horizontal axis for the Chart component.• Axis Color

Click the color selector button adjacent to Show Axis to set the axis color.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies to the horizontal axis and tick marks.

• WeightAxis Weight controls the width of the axis. Adjust the value in the Weight box to set the axis width.Note: This option applies to the horizontal axis and tick marks.

• Show Major TicksClick Show Major Ticks to display vertical tick marks where the major grid lines intersect the horizontal axis.

186 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 187: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab 11

Note: This option does not apply to the Column and Line Chart components.

• Show Minor TicksClick Show Minor Ticks to display vertical tick marks where the minor grid lines intersect the horizontal axis.Note: This option does not apply to the Column and Line Chart components.

Horizontal Axis LabelsThe options in this area configure the appearance of the value labels that appear along the horizontal axis.• Show Labels

Click Show Labels to display value labels on the horizontal axis. The value labels appear where the major grid lines intersect the horizontal axis.

• Font SettingsFor information on Font Settings see “Font settings” on page 156.

• Numeric FormatFor information on the Numeric Format list see “Numeric Format” on page 160.Note: This option does not apply to the Line, Column, Radar, and Filled Radar Chart components.

Series buttonNote: The options enabled by this button do not apply to the Area, Stacked Area, and Filled Radar Chart components.

ValuesThe options in this area configure the appearance of the value labels for the selected component. The value labels are displayed when the pointer passes over a value marker symbol. The following options are available:• Show Values

Click Show Values to display value labels when the pointer passes over a marker symbol.Note: This option does not apply to the XY and Bubble Chart components.

• Font SettingsFor information on Font Settings see “Font settings” on page 156.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 187

Page 188: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab11

Note: This option does not apply to the XY and Bubble Chart components.• Numeric Format

For information on the Numeric Format list see “Numeric Format” on page 160.Note: This option does not apply to the XY and Bubble Chart components.

• Current ValueThis option controls the value displayed on the value labels. The following options are available: • X Values • Y Values • Size ValuesNote: This option applies only to the XY, Bubble, OHLC, and Candlestick Chart components.

Plot SettingsThe options in this area configure the plot area markers for the Chart component. The following options are available:• Show Markers

Click Show Markers to display line markers on the Chart component. Note: This option applies only to the Line, Combination, and Radar Chart components.

• Use Custom ColorClick Use Custom Color to customize the appearance of the Chart component.Note: This option does not apply to the Combination Chart component.

• Marker SizeAdjust the value in the Maker Size box to set the size of the markers displayed on the Chart component. Note: This option applies only to the Line, Combination, and Radar Chart components.

• TransparencyFor information on Transparency see “Transparency” on page 158.

• Show LinesClick Show Lines to display dividing lines between the pie slices. Note: This option applies only to the Pie Chart component.

188 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 189: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab 11

• WeightThis option controls the width of the dividing lines. Adjust the value in the Weight box to customize the line weight.Note: This option is available only for the Pie Chart component.

• Show HighlightsClick Show Highlights to enable the marker highlight display. Enabling this option displays a round highlight effect behind the chart marker symbols.Note: This option applies only to the Radar Chart component.

• Bar WidthAdjust the value in the Bar Width box from 1 to 100 to set the width of the bars displayed on the Chart componentNote: This option applies only to the Bar Chart Component.

• TransparencyFor information on Transparency see “Transparency” on page 158.

• Bar GapAdjust the value in the Bar Gap box from 1 to 100 to set the distance between bars displayed on the Chart component.Note: This option applies only to the Stacked Column and Stacked Bar Chart components.

• Bar OverlapAdjust the value in the Bar Overlap box from 1 to 100 to set the overlapping proximity of the bars displayed on the Chart component. The higher the value in the Bar Overlap box, the more the bars overlap.

BarsThe options in this area configure the appearance of the series markers for the Chart component. The following options are available:• Series

Click an option from the Series list to select the series to modify. The Bar Color option applies only to the selected series.

• Bar ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Bar Color to customize the appearance of the bars displayed on the Chart component.

Note: The options in this area apply only to the Column, Stacked Column, Bar, and Stacked Bar Chart components.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 189

Page 190: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab11

Lines & MarkersNote: The options in this section apply only to the Line, Area, Stacked Area, and Radar Chart components.The options in this area configure the appearance of the series markers for the Chart component. The following options are available:• Series

Click an option on the Series list to select the series to modify.• Line Color

Click the color selector button adjacent to Line Color to customize the appearance of the lines displayed on the Chart component. For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the Line and Radar Chart components.

• WeightAdjust the value in the Weight box to set the width of the line for the selected series.Note: This option applies only to the Line and Radar Chart components.

• MarkerClick a marker format from the Marker list to set the marker symbol displayed on the Chart component. The following options are available: • Circle• Star• Diamond• Triangle• XNote: The option applies only to the Line and Radar Chart components.

• Marker ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to the Marker box to customize the color of the markers displayed on the Chart component. For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the Line and Radar Chart components.

190 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 191: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab 11

MarkersNote: The options in this area apply only to the OHLC and Candlestick Chart components.The options in this area customize the markers displayed on the Chart components. The following options are available:• Series

Click one of the items on the Series list to specify the series for which you want to customize colors.

• Positive ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Positive Color to customize the color for a series in which the close value is higher than the open value.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• Negative ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Negative color to customize the color for a series in which the close value is lower than the open value.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Series SettingsNote: The option in this area is available only for the Area, Stacked Area, and Filled Radar Chart components.The option in this area customizes the appearance of the series displayed on the Chart component. The following option is available:• Transparency

For information on Transparency see “Transparency” on page 158.

Specific to the Pie Chart component

Series buttonSlicesThe options in this area configure the appearance of the pie slices for the Pie Chart component.• Data Point

Click an option on the Data Point list to select the slice to be customized.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 191

Page 192: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab11

• Slice ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Slice Color to customize the color of the slice selected on the Data Point list.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Combination Chart component

Series buttonColumn Plot SettingsThe options in this area configure the plot area markers for the Combination Chart component. The following options are available:• Bar Width

Adjust the value in the Bar Width box from 1 to 100 to set the width of the bars displayed on the Combination Chart component

• TransparencyFor information on Transparency see “Transparency” on page 158.

Line Plot SettingsThe options in this area configure the plot area markers for the Combination Chart component.• Show Markers

Click Show Markers to display line markers on the selected chart.• Marker Size

Adjust the value in the Maker Size box to set the size of the markers displayed on the Combination Chart component.

• TransparencyFor information on Transparency see “Transparency” on page 158.

Series MarkersThe options in this area customize the appearance of the Series Markers that appear on the Combination Chart component. The following options are available:• Use Custom Color

Click Use Custom Color to customize the appearance of the selected markers.

192 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 193: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab 11

• SeriesClick an option on the Series list to select the series to modify. The other options in the section apply only to the selected.

• Series TypeClick an option from the Series Type list to select the type of markers to represent the selected Series.

• Bar ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to Bar Color to customize the appearance of the bars displayed on the Combination Chart component.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option is enabled only when Series Type is set to Column.

• Line Color• Click the color selector button adjacent to Line color to customize the

appearance of the lines displayed on the Combination Chart component.Note: This option is enabled only when Series Type is set to Line.• Line Weight

Adjust the value in the Line Weight box to control the width of the line for the selected series.Note: This option is enabled only when Series Type is set to Line.

• MarkerClick a marker format from the Marker list to set the marker symbol displayed on the Combination Chart component. The following options are available: • Circle• Diamond• Star• Triangle• X

• Marker ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to the Marker box to customize the appearance of the markers displayed on the Combination Chart component.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 193

Page 194: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab11

Specific to the Bubble Chart component

Series buttonPlot SettingsThe options in this area configure the plot area markers for the Bubble Chart component. The following options are available:• Use Custom Color

Click Use Custom Color to customize the appearance of the Bubble Chart component.

• Bubble SizeAdjust the value in the Bubble Size box from 1 to 100 to customize the size of the bubbles displayed on the Bubble Chart component.

• TransparencyFor information on Transparency see “Transparency” on page 158.

BubbleThe options in this area configure the appearance of the series markers for the Bubble Chart component. The following options are available:• Series

Click an option from the Series list to select the series to modify. • Bubble Color

Click the color selector button adjacent to Color to customize the appearance on the bubbles that appear on the Bubble Chart component.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the XY Chart component

Series buttonPlot SettingsThe options in this area configure the plot area markers for the XY Chart component. The following options are available:• Use Custom Color

Click Use Custom Color to customize the appearance of the XY Chart component.

194 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 195: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab 11

• Symbol SizeAdjust the value in the Symbol Size box to customize the size of the symbols displayed on the XY Chart component

• TransparencyFor information on Transparency see “Transparency” on page 158.

SymbolThe options in this section configure the appearance of the series markers for the XY Chart component. The following options are available:• Series

Click an option on the Series list to select the series to modify. The Bubble Color option applies only to the selected series.

• SymbolsClick a symbol format from the Symbol list to set the symbol displayed on the Combination Chart component. The following options are available: • Circle• Diamond• Star• Triangle• X

• Symbol ColorClick the color selector button adjacent to the Symbols list to customize the appearance of the symbols displayed on the XY Chart Component.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Filled Radar Chart component

Series buttonSeries ColorsThe options in this area configure the appearance of the series markers for the Filled Radar Chart component. The following options are available:• Series

Click an option from the Series list to select the series to modify. The other parameters in this section apply only to the selected series.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 195

Page 196: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Chart Components ReferenceAppearance tab11

• Fill Color Click the color selector button adjacent to Fill Color to customize the appearance of the area filled in to represent data on the Filled Radar Chart component.For information on the color selector button see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Series Settings• Transparency

For information on Transparency see “Transparency” on page 158.

196 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 197: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Single Value Component Reference

chapter

Page 198: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Single Value Component ReferenceOverview12

Overview

This chapter discusses Properties panel features for the components in the Single Value folder.

General tabThe features on the General tab let you link the single value component to data.

Common to all componentsThis section applies to all single value components.

TitleTo give the single value component a title, type the desired title in the Title text box. Alternatively, you can click the Title Cell Selector button, an select a title in the imported spreadsheet. For information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Common to most componentsThis section applies to all single value components except the dual slider components.

Link to CellTo link the single value component to data, you can enter the data value manually in the Link to Cell box. Alternatively, you can click the Link to Cell Cell Selector button to link the single value component to a cell in the imported spreadsheet. When the user changes the value in the single value component, the value in the linked cell changes. For more information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to Dual Slider componentsThis section applies to the following components:• Dual Slider-0• Dual Slider-1

198 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 199: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Single Value Component ReferenceBehavior tab 12

Low DataLow Data lets you specify the default value for the left pointer on the dual slider component. To enter the low data value manually, type the desired value in the Low Data box. Alternatively, you can click the Low Data Cell Selector button to select the value in the imported spreadsheet. For information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

High DataHigh Data lets you specify the default value for the right pointer on the dual slider component. To enter the high data value manually, type the desired value in the High Data box. Alternatively, you can click the High Data Cell Selector button to select the value in the imported spreadsheet. For information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Behavior tabThe features on the Behavior tab determine how the single value component behaves when the Xcelsius Visualization is run in its interactive format.

Common to all componentsThe features in this section appear on the Behavior tabs for all single value components. Depending on the component that you are working with, some of these features may be unavailable.

Dynamic VisibilityFor information about the features in the Dynamic Visibility area, see “Dynamic Visibility” on page 157.

Initial Limits CalculationThe Initial Limits Calculation list provides several options for setting limits for single value components, and ensuring that the initial values are within the limits. Depending on the component that you are working with, some of these options may be unavailable:• Manual

The minimum and maximum limits are set manually.• Value Based

The limits comprise a tight range around the value.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 199

Page 200: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Single Value Component ReferenceBehavior tab12

• Zero Based The limits comprise a range that includes the value, and have zero as either the upper or lower limit.

• Zero Centered The limits comprise a range that includes the value and zero.

• Alert Based The limits comprise a range that covers all alert levels.

The Initial Limits Calculation list is unavailable for play button, spinner, and value components.

Lower Limit BehaviorThe Lower Limit Behavior list provides three options for setting the behavior of the minimum value on the single value component. Depending on the component that you are working with, some of these options may be unavailable:• Fixed

The user cannot set the value to a number less than the minimum value.• Adjustable

The user can adjust the minimum value when the Xcelsius Visualization is run in its interactive format. This option is available for all components except the value components.

• OpenThe user can set the value to any number that does not conflict with the maximum value.

Note: The Lower Limit Behavior list is unavailable for play button components.

Upper Limit BehaviorThe Upper Limit Behavior list provides three options for setting the behavior of the maximum value on the single value component. Depending on the component that you are working with, some of these options may be unavailable:• Fixed

The user cannot set the value to a number greater than the maximum value.• Adjustable

The user can adjust the maximum value when the Xcelsius Visualization is run in its interactive format. This option is available for all components except the value components.

200 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 201: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Single Value Component ReferenceBehavior tab 12

• Open The user can set the value to any number that does not conflict with the Lower Limit.

The Upper Limit Behavior list is unavailable for play button components.

Minimum ValueTo set the minimum value for the component, type the value in the Minimum Value box. Alternatively, you can click the Minimum Value Cell Selector button to select the value in the imported spreadsheet. For more information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Maximum ValueTo set the maximum value for the component, type the value in the Maximum Value box. Alternatively, you can click the Maximum Value Cell Selector button to select the value in the imported spreadsheet. For more information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Increment SizeUse the Increment Size box to restrict manually entered values to specific increments, such as dozens. Enter the desired increment in the Increment Size box.

Snap to ScaleSelect the Snap to Scale check box to force the graphical representation of the component to match the value.Note: Snap to Scale is unavailable for play button and value components.

Play OptionsThe Play Options area lets you customize the behavior of the play button for single value components. Note: The Play Options area is unavailable for dual slider and spinner components.

Play TimeThe Play Time box lets you set the duration of the play sequence in seconds. You can enter a value from 1 to 100, with 1 being the shortest duration, and 100 being the longest duration.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 201

Page 202: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Single Value Component ReferenceBehavior tab12

Show Play ButtonThe Show Play Button check box controls the visibility of the play button for the component.

Auto RewindThe Auto Rewind check box controls whether the play sequence for the component automatically rewinds when the Xcelsius Visualization is run in its interactive format.

Auto ReplayThe Auto Replay check box controls whether the play sequence for the component automatically replays when the Xcelsius Visualization is run in its interactive format.

Sound EnabledSelect the Sound Enabled check box to enable sound for the component.

Show SliderThe Show Slider check box appears in the Play Options area for the play button components only. This check box controls the visibility of the slider for the play button components.

Show Rew/FwdThe Show Rew/Fwd check box appears in the Play Options area for the play button components only. This check box controls the visibility of the rewind and forward buttons for the play button components.

Show Prev/NextThe Show Prev/Next check box appears in the Play Options area for the play button components only. This check box controls the visibility of the previous and next buttons for the play button components.

Common to some componentsThe features in this section apply to specific components in the Single Value folder.

Mouse SensitivityThe Mouse Sensitivity slider determines how sensitive the value of the component is to pointer movements. When the setting is high, small pointer movements can change the value by large increments. When the setting is low, pointer movements change the value by small increments. The Mouse Sensitivity slider is available for value, gauge, and dial components.

202 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 203: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Single Value Component ReferenceAlerts tab 12

Mouse TrackingClick one of the options under Mouse Tracking to specify the pointer action that the user must perform to change the value on a component:• Vertical

The user must move the pointer vertically to change the value.• Radial

The user must move the pointer in a circular motion to change the value.The Mouse Tracking options are available for the gauge and dial components only.

Autoresize Value BoxSelect the Autoresize Value Box check box to enable the component to automatically resize and fit the number displayed. The Autoresize Value Box check box appears for the spinner and value components only.

Object ElasticityThe Object Elasticity slider appears for the gauge components only, and determines the elasticity of the movement of the needle.

Scroll BehaviorThe Scroll Behavior options appear for the values components only. Click one of the options under Scroll Behavior to determine the action the user must perform to change the value:• Manual

The user must drag the pointer vertically to change the value.• Auto

The user must drag the pointer and place it above or below the value component to change the value.

Alerts tabFor information about the features on the Alerts tab, see “Common Alerts Tab features” on page 163.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 203

Page 204: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Single Value Component ReferenceAppearance tab12

Appearance tab

The features on the Appearance tab let you customize the appearance of the single value component.

Common to all componentsThe features in this section apply to all or most single value components.

Titles buttonShow TitleThe Show Title check box controls the visibility of the component title. When you select Show Title, the following options for customizing the appearance of the value become available:• Position

For information about the Position list, see “Position” on page 159.• X Shift

For information about the X Shift box, see “X Shift” on page 158.• Y Shift

For information about the Y Shift box, see “Y Shift” on page 159.• Font Settings

For information about the features in the Font Settings area, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Show ValueThe Show Value check box controls the visibility of the selected value for the component. When you select Show Value, the following options for customizing the appearance of the value become available:• Position

For information about the Position list, see “Font settings” on page 156.• X Shift

For information about the X Shift box, see “X Shift” on page 158.• Y Shift

For information about the Y Shift box, see “Y Shift” on page 159.

204 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 205: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Single Value Component ReferenceAppearance tab 12

• Font SettingsFor information about the features in the Font Settings area, see “Font settings” on page 156.

• Numeric FormatFor information about the Numeric Format list, see “Numeric Format” on page 160.

• Low XThis option appears for the dual slider components only. The Low X box lets you shift the low value label left or right relative to the position specified on the Position list. Negative values shift the low value label left; positive values shift the low value label right.

• High XThis option appears for the dual slider components only. The High X box lets you shift the high value label left or right relative to the position specified on the Position list. Negative values shift the low value label left; positive values shift the low value label right.

• Low YThis option appears for the dual slider components only. The Low Y box lets you shift the low value label up or down relative to the position specified on the Position list. Negative values shift the low value label downward; positive values shift the low value label upward.

• High YThis option appears for the dual slider components only. The High Y box lets you shift the high value label up or down relative to the position specified on the Position list. Negative values shift the high value label downward; positive values shift the high value label upward.

Layout buttonUse Custom ColorSelecting the Use Custom Color check box provides the following options for customizing the color of a part of the component. Some of these options may be unavailable depending on the component that you are working with:• Low Marker Color• High Marker Color• Gutter Color• Background Color

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 205

Page 206: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Single Value Component ReferenceAppearance tab12

• Up Marker• Default Arrow• Selected Arrow• Default Fill• Selected Fill

• Down Marker• Default Arrow• Selected Arrow• Default Fill• Selected Fill

• Show Background• Play Button Color• Play Symbol Color• Slider Gutter Color• Marker Color• Limits Fill Color• Fill Color• Pointer• Rim• Middle• Backing• GripTo customize a color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For information on Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Common to some componentsThe features in this section apply to specific single value component types.

Titles buttonThe features in this section apply to progress bar, gauge, and slider components.

206 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 207: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Single Value Component ReferenceAppearance tab 12

Show LimitsThe Show Limits check box controls the visibility of the upper and lower limits for the component. When you select Show Limits, the following options for customizing the appearance of the upper and lower limits are available:• Font Settings

For information about the features in the Font Settings area, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Layout buttonThe features in this section apply to progress bar, gauge, slider, and dial components.

Show TicksThe Show Ticks check box controls the visibility of ticks (the small markers that distinguish values) for the component. When you select Show Ticks, the following options for customizing the appearance of the ticks are available:• Number of Ticks

The Number of Ticks box lets you specify the number of large ticks displayed for the component. You can enter a value from 2 to 21.

• Number of SubticksThe Number of Subticks box lets you specify the number of small ticks displayed between the large ticks. You can enter a value from 0 to 21.

• Ticks ColorTo customize the color of the ticks, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For information on Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• Minimum AngleThis option is available for gauge and dial components only. The Minimum Angle box lets you specify the minimum angle the needle can rotate to. Note: Minimum Angle is unavailable if you chose Open from the Lower Limit Behavior list.

• Maximum AngleThis option is available for gauge and dial components only. The Maximum Angle box lets you specify the maximum angle the needle can rotate to. Note: Maximum Angle is unavailable if you chose Open from the Lower Limit Behavior list.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 207

Page 208: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Single Value Component ReferenceAppearance tab12

208 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 209: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Selector Components Reference

chapter

Page 210: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceOverview13

Overview

This chapter discusses Properties panel features for the components in the Selectors folder.

General TabCommon to all Selector components

Insert DataThe options in this area define the data for the Selector components and how the components will behave when a selection is made. Note: On the Properties panel of the Accordion Menu component, the Insert Data area is equivalent to the Data area.

Insert InClick the cell selector button adjacent to the Insert In box to select the cells into which the selected data is inserted.For information on the cell selector button see the General Chapter.Note: The Insert In box is equivalent to the Insert Item In box and the Insert Category In, for items and categories respectively, box on the Properties panel of the Accordion Menu.

Insert OptionThe options on this list determine the structure of the data that is inserted when a selection is made.There are six parameters:• Position

A target cell is linked to the selector component. When a selection is made on the selector component the position value of the selection is entered in the target cell.

• LabelA target cell is linked to the selector component. When a selection is made on the selector component the label of the selection is entered in the target cell.

• ValueA target cell is linked to the selector component. When a selection is made on the selector component the source data value of the selection is entered in the target cell.

210 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 211: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceGeneral Tab 13

• RowsA target row is linked to the selector component. When a selection is made on the selector component the row of source data values of the selection are entered in the target row.

• ColumnsA target column is linked to the selector component. When a selection is made on the selector component the column of source data values of the selection are entered in the target column.

• Status ListA target range of cells is linked to the selector component. When a selection is made on the selector component a value of 1 is entered in the target cell in the range representing that selection and a value of 0 is entered in the other target cells in the range.

Note: The target cells must be empty.

CategoriesThis option creates expandable top-level representations of each group of items. The Add and Remove buttons control the groups displayed in the Categories box.Note: This option applies only to the Accordion Menu component.

NameType in the Name box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the label for the currently selected category.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the Accordion Menu component.

ItemsClick the cell selector button adjacent to the Items box to select the labels that are associated with the currently selected category.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the Accordion Menu component.

Information buttonFor information on the Information button, see “Information button” on page 163.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 211

Page 212: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceGeneral Tab13

Source DataType in the Source Data box, click the Browse button, or click the cell selector button adjacent to the Source Data box to select the data that is inserted when a selection is made when the Insert Option is rows, columns, or values.For information on the Browse button, see “Browse button” on page 163For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: • The Source Data option applies only to the following components:

• Check Box• Filter• Icon• Play Selector• Source Data• Table• List View• Toggle Button

• The Source Data Browse button does not appear on the Properties panel of the following components:• Filter• List View• Play Selector• Table

Common to most Selector components

TitlesThe options in this section set the titles and labels for the Selector components.Note: The Titles area does not apply to the Table and Icon components.

TitleType in the Title box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the title for the component. For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

212 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 213: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceGeneral Tab 13

LabelsClick the Browse button adjacent to the Labels box to manually enter the labels, or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the labels. For information on the Browse button, see “Browse button” on page 163.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: • The Labels options do not apply to the following components:

• Label Based Menu• List Builder• Accordion• List View• Filter

• The Labels Browse button is available only for the following components:• Check Box• Combo Box• Fish-Eye Picture Menu• List Box

TitlesClick the Browse button adjacent to the Titles box to manually enter the titles, or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the titles for the component.For information on the Browse button, see “Browse button” on page 163.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: Titles is not the same option as Title, and applies only to the Filter component.

Source TitleType in the Source Title box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the title for the list of items that can be selected on the List Builder component when it is in interactive format.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the List Builder component.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 213

Page 214: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceGeneral Tab13

Destination TitleType in the Destination Title box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the title for the list of items that have been selected from the Source list on the List Builder component when it is in interactive format.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the List Builder component.

ValuesClick the cell selector button adjacent to the Values box to select the values that will be displayed as labels on the Ticker component.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the Ticker component.

Display DataClick the cell selector button adjacent to the Display Data box to select the data that is displayed on the component. For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: The Display Data area applies only to the following components:

• Table• List View• Icon

OrientationThe options in this area control how the selectable elements of the component are arranged. Click Horizontal or Vertical to select the orientation of the component.Note: The Orientation area applies only to the Label Based Menu and Radio Button components.

Image FilesThe options in this section set the image files for the selected component.

EmbeddedClick Embedded to embed the image files in the selected component. The selected files will become a part of the exported Xcelsius Visualization.

214 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 215: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceGeneral Tab 13

ImportWhen you click Import the imageData dialog box appears. On the imageData dialog box specify the images or SWF files to embed in the selected component. To import an external file to be embedded in the report, click the File Browser button and select the file to be imported.Note: • Import is only available if Embedded has been selected.• The Image Files apply only to the Fish-Eye Picture Menu and Sliding

Picture Menu components.

Specific to the Icon component

LabelType in the Label box or click the adjacent cell selector button to set the label for the Icon component.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Filter component

Display OptionsThis area controls the number of combo boxes displayed for the selected Filter component.

Number of FiltersAdjust the value displayed in the Number of Filters box to adjust the number of filters displayed on the Filter component.

Specific to the List Builder component

LabelsThe options in this area set the labels for the List Builder component.

Execute Button LabelType in the Execute Button Label box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the label displayed on the Execute button on the List Builder component.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 215

Page 216: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceBehavior tab13

Add Button LabelType in the Add Button Label box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the label displayed on the Add button on the List Builder component. For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Remove Button LabelType in the Remove Button Label box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the label displayed on the Remove button on the List Builder component.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

LabelsClick the Browse button adjacent to the Labels box to manually enter the labels, or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the labels for the List Builder component.For information on the Browse button, see “Browse button” on page 163.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Behavior tab

Common to most Selector components

Dynamic VisibilityFor information on the features available in the Dynamic Visibility area, see “Dynamic Visibility” on page 157.Note: The Dynamic Visibility area does not apply to the Source Data component.

Behavior OptionsNote: The Behavior Options area does not apply to the following components:

• Source Data• Play Selector• List Builder• Accordion Menu

216 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 217: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceBehavior tab 13

Always ExpandedClick Always Expanded to permanently display all of the labels contained on the menu. Selecting this option disables several other options and enables the Update On parameter.

Sound EnabledCheck the Sound Enabled box to enable sound for the selected component

Open AnimationClick Open Animation to enable the open/close animation. The feature adds a fraction-of-a-second animation to the way it is opened and closed.

Open DirectionThis option defines the direction into which the menu will expand once it is opened. Note: • For the Label Based Menu and Radio Button components, the behaviors

for this parameter depend on the Orientation parameter. When the orientation is horizontal the following options are available on the Open Direction list:• Left• RightWhen the orientation is vertical the following options are available on the Open Direction list:• Center down• Left down• Right down• Center up• Right up• Left up

• This option does not apply to the following components:• Fish-Eye Picture Menu• Sliding Picture Menu• Ticker

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 217

Page 218: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceBehavior tab13

Update OnThe options on this list define how the component recognizes that a selection has been made. The following options are available:• Mouse Click

The user must click on an item to select it. • Mouse Over

An item is selected when the pointer passes over it. Note: This option does not apply to the following components:

• Fish-Eye Picture Menu• Sliding Picture Menu• Ticker

Open OnThe options on this list define how the component recognizes that a selection has been made that requires data to be displayed. The following options are available:• Mouse Click

Data is displayed only when the user clicks on the selector component.• Mouse Over

Data is displayed only when the user moves the pointer over the selector component.

Note: This option does not apply to the following components:• Fish-Eye Picture Menu• Sliding Picture Menu• Ticker

Default OptionsDefault SelectionThis feature sets the default state of the component. You can customize which portion of the component is selected, or if the component is selected or not selected when the Xcelsius Visualization is first launched. The options on the list vary depending on the component you are working with. Note: This option does not apply to the following components:

• Filter• List Builder

218 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 219: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceBehavior tab 13

• Accordion Menu• Source Data

Default Category Choose the Category that will be selected in the component when the Xcelsius Visualization is loaded. This option also determines which default data is inserted into the Insert Category In cell when the Xcelsius Visualization is loaded. Note: This option applies only to the Accordion Menu component.

Default ItemChoose the Category Item that will be selected in the component when the Xcelsius Visualization is loaded. This option also determines which default data is inserted into the Insert Item In range when the Xcelsius Visualization is loaded. Note: This option applies only to the Accordion Menu component.

Range OptionsIgnore End BlanksClick Ignore End Blanks to prevent the items past the last non-empty Label from being shown in the component. This option is useful when you need the number of items within the component to be variable. Note: • Since the Label data source is Static, the number of items within the

Component are only updated when a data source is refreshed using either the Web Service option or the XML Data Button.

• Ignore End Blanks does not apply to the following components:• Check Box• Icon• Toggle Button• Filter• List Builder• Accordion Menu• Source Data

Ignore Category Blanks Click Ignore Category Blanks to prevent all of the empty categories from being displayed in the component. This option is useful when you need to display a variable number of categories in your component.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 219

Page 220: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceBehavior tab13

Note: • This option applies only to the Accordion Menu component.• Although the Accordion Menu may not be displaying all of the data within

the Data range, the performance of the Xcelsius Visualization is affected by the size of the range.

Ignore Item End Blanks Click Ignore Item End Blanks to prevent all of the empty items past the last non-empty item from being displayed in the component. This option is useful when you need to display a variable amount of data in your component. Note: • This option applies only to the Accordion Menu component.• Although the Accordion Menu may not be displaying all of the data within

the Data range, the performance of the Xcelsius Visualization is affected by the size of the range.

Specific to the Fish-Eye Picture Menu component

Fish Eye behaviorFish Eye FrictionAdjust the Fish Eye Friction scale to configure the friction of the fish eye popup effect as on a mouse-over event.

Fish Eye MaxAdjust the Fish Eye Max scale to change the mouse-over size of the Fish-Eye Picture Menu thumbnails.

Specific to the Sliding Picture Menu component

Slide methodThe options on this list control how the Sliding Picture Menu scrolls through the thumbnails. The following are the available options:• Arrows

The user must click on the arrow icons to scroll through the Sliding Picture Menu thumbnails.

220 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 221: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceBehavior tab 13

• Mouse The Sliding Picture Menu will scroll through the thumbnails as the user moves the mouse.

Slide incrementThe options on this list control the scrolling behavior of the Sliding Picture Menu. The following are the available options:• One

The Sliding Picture Menu will scroll through the thumbnails one at a time. • Page

The Sliding Picture Menu will scroll through the thumbnails a page at a time.

FrictionAdjust the Friction scale to control the friction of the slide behavior as the user scrolls through the thumbnails for the Sliding Picture Menu.

Specific to the Table component

Row selectabilityThe options in this area configure whether the rows of a Table selector component are selectable

Row NumberEnter or adjust the row number in the Row Number box. This number affects the Selectable check box.

Selectable check boxThis option enables or disables row selection for the row displayed in the Row Number box.

Select All Click the Select All button to enable row selection for all rows of the table.

Deselect AllClick the Deselect All button to disable row selection for all rows of the table.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 221

Page 222: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceBehavior tab13

Specific to the Ticker component

Ticker optionsLabels SelectableThis option enables label selection for the Ticker component. When this option is unselected the Ticker behaves as a scrolling text component and doesn't allow the user to make a selection.

SeparatorEnter a value in the Separator box to change the label separator for the ticker component.

DirectionClick the scroll direction on the Direction list for the ticker component. The following options are available:• Left• Right

Scroll SpeedAdjust the value in the Scroll Speed box to change the scroll speed of the ticker component.

Specific to the Accordion Menu component

Open/Close behaviorThe options in this area control the open/close behavior for the Accordion Menu component.

Friction Adjust the Friction scale to customize the way that the menu items open/close.

Specific to the Source Data component

Source data optionsIndex CellType in the Index Cell box or click the adjacent cell selector button to bind the Selected Index of the Source Data component to the spreadsheet. When the Xcelsius Visualization runs, it will select the item in its source data at the

222 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 223: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAlerts tab 13

specified index. When the index is bound to the spreadsheet, any changes to the underlying spreadsheet value will cause the Source Data component to insert the source data that corresponds to the new index. For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Play Selector component

Play optionsShow SliderClick Show Slider to display a slider that tracks the progress of the presentation of the Play Selector component when it is in interactive format.

Auto RewindClick Auto Rewind to have the presentation of the Play Selector component automatically rewound after playing.

Auto ReplayClick Auto Replay to have the presentation automatically replayed after playing.

Sound EnabledClick Sound Enabled to enable sound effects when selections are made on the Play Selector component.

Show Rew/FwdClick Show Rew/Fwd to display the Rewind and Fast Forward buttons on the Play Selector component.

Show Prev/NextClick Show Prev/Next to display the Previous and Next buttons on the Play Selector component.

Play TimeAdjust the value in the Play Time box to control the length of time the Play Selector component will play.

Alerts tabFor information on the features available on the Alerts Tab, see “Common Alerts Tab features” on page 163.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 223

Page 224: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab13

Note: The Alerts Tab applies only to the following components:• Ticker• Icon

Appearance tabNote: The Source Data component does not have an Appearance Tab.

Common to most Selector components

Label backgroundNote: The Label Background area applies only to the Label Based Menu, Check Box, and Filter components

Show BackgroundClick Show Background to display a background behind the items on the Ticker component.

Use Custom ColorClick Use Custom Color to customize the appearance of the component. The parts of the component that can be customized vary depending on the component you are working with. The following options can be customized by clicking the color selector button:• Fill Color

Note: Fill Color applies only to the Ticker component.• Default Fill Color

Note: Default Fill Color applies only to the Label Based Menu.• Selected Fill Color

Note: Selected Fill Color applies only to the Label Based Menu and Filter components.

• Mouse Over Fill ColorNote: Mouse Over Fill Color applies only to the Label Based Menu and Filter components.

For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

224 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 225: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab 13

SeparationAdjust the value in the Separation box to control the spacing between menu items. The higher the Separation number, the greater the spacing between menu items.Note: This option applies only to the Label Based Menu component.

TransparencyFor information on the transparency feature, see “Transparency” on page 158.

LabelsNote: • The Labels area does not apply to the following components:

• Radio Button• Table• Check Box• List Builder• List View• Play Selector

• The Labels area corresponds to the Item Labels area on the Properties panel of the Accordion Menu component.

Show LabelsSelect Show Labels to display labels on the component.Note: This option applies only to the following components:

• Fish-Eye Picture Menu• Sliding Picture Menu• Toggle Button

PositionFor information about the Position list, see “Position” on page 159.Note: This option applies only to the following components:

• Radio Button• Sliding Picture Menu

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 225

Page 226: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab13

AlignmentFor information about the Alignment list, see “Alignment” on page 159.Note: This option does not apply to the following components:

• Ticker• Icon• Sliding Picture Menu• Filter

X ShiftFor information on X Shift, see“X Shift” on page 158.Note: This option applies only to the Label Based Menu, List Box, and Toggle Button components.

Y ShiftFor information on Y Shift, see“Y Shift” on page 159.Note: This option applies only to the Label Based Menu, List Box, and Toggle Button components.

Font SettingsFor information on Font Settings, see “Font settings” on page 156.Note: This option does not apply to the Icon component.

Numeric FormatFor information on the Numeric Format list, see “Numeric Format” on page 160.Note: This option does not apply to the following components:

• Ticker• Icon• Toggle Button

Mouse Over TextClick the adjacent color selector button to customize the Mouse Over Text color.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the following components:

• Combo Box• List Box

226 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 227: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab 13

• Label Based Menu• Ticker• Accordion Menu• Filter

Selected TextClick the adjacent color selector button to customize the Selected Text color.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option applies only to the following components:

• Combo Box• List Box• Label Based Menu• Ticker• Toggle Button• Accordion Menu• Filter

Rows DisplayedAdjust the value in the Rows Displayed box to control the number of rows that appear in the drop-down list. Note: This option applies only to the Combo Box and Filter components.

Filter GapAdjust the value in the Filter Gap box to set the amount of space displayed between the lists on the Filter component.Note: This option applies only to the Filter component.

Title buttonNote: This area does not apply to the Radio Button, Table, Toggle Button, and Play Selector components.

Show TitleClick Show Title to display a title on the component.

PositionFor information about the Position list, see “Position” on page 159. X ShiftFor information on X Shift, see “X Shift” on page 158.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 227

Page 228: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab13

Y ShiftFor information on Y Shift, see “Y Shift” on page 159.

Font SettingsFor information on Font Settings, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Layout buttonNote: This button applies only to the following components:

• Fish-Eye Picture Menu• Sliding Picture Menu• List Builder• Accordion Menu• List View• Play Selector

Use Custom ColorClick Use Custom Color to customize the appearance of the component. The parts of the component that can be customized vary depending on the component you are working with. The following options can be customized by clicking the color selector button:• Fill Color

Note: This option applies only to the following components:• List Builder• Accordion Menu

• Category areaNote: These options apply only to the Accordion Menu component.• Default• Mouse Over• Selected

• Item area• Default• Mouse Over• Selected

• Label Bar ColorNote: This option applies only to the Fish-Eye Picture Menu and Sliding Picture Menu components.

228 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 229: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab 13

• Background ColorNote: This option applies only to the Fish-Eye Picture and Sliding Picture Menu components.

• Arrow UpNote: This option applies only to the Sliding Picture Menu component.

• Arrow DownNote: This option applies only to the Sliding Picture Menu component.

• Disabled ArrowNote: This option applies only to the Sliding Picture Menu component.

• Button UpNote: This option applies only to the Sliding Picture Menu component.

• Button DownNote: This option applies only to the Sliding Picture Menu component.

• Disabled ButtonNote: This option applies only to the Sliding Picture Menu component.

• Navigation Button areaNote: These options apply only to the Accordion Menu component.• Arrow Default• Arrow Down• Arrow Disabled• Fill Default• Fill Down• Fill Disabled

• Source Label Background areaNote: These options apply only to the List Builder component.• Default Fill• Selected Fill• Mouse Over Fill

• Destination Label Background areaNote: These options apply only to the List Builder component.• Default Fill• Selected Fill• Mouse Over Fill

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 229

Page 230: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab13

• Buttons areaNote: These options apply only to the List Builder component.• Default Fill• Selected Fill

• Scroll Bar areaNote: These options apply only to the following components:

• List Builder• Accordion Menu• List View

• Thumb ColorNote: This option does not apply to the List View component.

• Arrow Color• Gutter Color• Bar Color

Note: This option does not apply to the List View component.• Thumb Nail Background area

Note: These options apply only to the Fish-Eye Picture Menu and Sliding Picture Menu components.• Default Color• Select Color• Mouse Over Color

• Show Background areaNote: These options apply only to the Play Selector component.• Background Color• Button Background Color• Button Foreground Color• Gutter Color• Slide Color

• Header areaNote: These options apply only to the List View component.• Header Color• Selected Fill• Mouse Over Fill

230 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 231: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab 13

• Sort Symbol areaNote: These options apply only to the List View component.• Symbol Color• Selected Fill• Mouse Over Fill

• Backing areaNote: This option applies only to the List View component.• Backing Color

• Row areaNote: These options apply only to the List View component.• Row Color 1• Selected Fill• Row Color 2• Mouse Over Fill

For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Image SizingNote: The options in the area apply only to the Fish-Eye Picture and Sliding Picture Menu components.The following options configure the image sizing behavior of the thumbnail images for the menu:• Method

Click an option from the Method list to set the sizing method of the thumbnail images for the menu. The following options are available:• None

The images will not change from their default size. Only the portion of the image that fits inside the thumbnail area will be visible.

• ScaleThe image will scale down to fit into the thumbnail area. The aspect ratio of the image will be preserved.

• StretchThe image will be sized to fit inside of the thumbnail area.

• HeightAdjust the value in the Height box to set the height of the thumbnail images.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 231

Page 232: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab13

• WidthAdjust the value in the Width box to set the width of the thumbnail images.

MarginsNote: The options in the area apply only to the Fish-Eye Picture and Sliding Picture Menu components.The following options are available:• Horizontal

Adjust the value in the Horizontal box to set the horizontal margin for the thumbnail area.

• VerticalAdjust the value in the Vertical box to set the vertical margin for the thumbnail area.

MarkersNote: • This area applies only to the Combo Box, List Box, Radio Button, Check

Box, Toggle Button, and Filter components.• On the Properties panel of the List Box and Radio Button components the

Markers & Backgrounds area corresponds to the Markers area.

Use Custom ColorClick Use Custom Color to customize the appearance of the component. The parts of the component that can be customized vary depending on the component you are working with. The following options can be customized by clicking the color selector button:• List Scroll Bar

Note: This option applies only to the Combo Box and Filter components.• List Gutter Color

Note: This option applies only to the Combo Box and Filter components.• Default Arrow Color

Note: This option applies only to the Combo Box and Filter components.• Default Fill

Note: This option applies only to the List Box component.• Selected Fill

Note: This option applies only to the List Box component.

232 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 233: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab 13

• Mouse Over Fill Note: This option applies only to the List Box component.

• Thumb ColorNote: This option applies only to the List Box component.

• ArrowNote: This option applies only to the List Box component.

• TransparencyNote: This option applies only to the List Box component.

• Off FillNote: This option applies only to the Toggle Button component.

• On FillNote: This option applies only to the Toggle Button component.

Show BackgroundNote: The Show Background options apply only to the Radio Button component.The following options are available in the Show Background area:• Background Fill Color

Click the adjacent color selector button to customize the background color of the component.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• TransparencyFor information on transparency, see “Transparency” on page 158.

• Marker SizeAdjust the value in the Marker Size box to specify the size of the component markers.

• X-MarginAdjust the value in the X-Margin box to control the amount of space between the left and right edges of the background and the radio buttons.

• Y-MarginAdjust the value in the Y-Margin box to control the amount of space between the top and bottom edges of the background and the radio buttons.

• Marker DefaultClick the adjacent color selector button to customize the default appearance of the marker.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 233

Page 234: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab13

For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• Marker SelectedClick the adjacent color selector button to customize the appearance of the marker when it is selected by the user.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Table component

GridThe options in this area enable the grid display for the Table component.

Show GridClick Show Grid to enable the grid display for the Table component.Note: Selecting the Show Grid option only displays a grid for cells that do not have a cell border or a cell pattern specified in Excel.

Grid ColorClick the adjacent color selector button to customize the appearance of the grid.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.Note: Grid Color is available only when Show Grid has been selected.

Table backgroundThe options in this area configure the colors of the highlights used to show selected rows and rows that the mouse pointer is over.Click the adjacent color selector buttons to customize the appearance of the Table component. The following options are available:• Selected Fill

This color will be overlaid above rows when they are selected. In order to keep spreadsheet cell colors from being hidden by the selection, the selection color is partially transparent.

• Mouse Over FillThis color will be overlaid above rows when the mouse pointer is over them. In order to keep spreadsheet cell colors from being hidden by the mouse over, the mouse over color is partially transparent.

234 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 235: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab 13

For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Scroll optionsEnable Scroll BarsClick Enable Scroll Bars to allow scroll bars to be displayed on the Table component.Scroll bars allow the user to navigate to the areas of the table that do not fit within the view panel.

Table ScaleAdjust the value in the Table Scale box to set the size of the labels displayed within the Table component.

Horizontal Scroll BehaviorThe options in this area customize the behavior of the horizontal scroll bar displayed on the Table component. The following options are available:• Enable

Click Enable to display a horizontal scroll bar on the Table component.• Disable

Click Disable to prevent the display of a horizontal scroll bar on the Table component.

• Auto HideClick Auto Hide to display a horizontal scroll bar on the Table component that will be hidden when all the labels on the Table component are visible.

Vertical Scroll BehaviorThe options in this area customize the behavior of the vertical scroll bar displayed on the Table component. The following options are available:• Enable

Click Enable to display a vertical scroll bar on the Table component.• Disable

Click Disable to prevent the display of a vertical scroll bar on the Table component.

• Auto HideClick Auto Hide to display a vertical scroll bar on the Table component that will be hidden when all the labels on the Table component are visible.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 235

Page 236: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab13

Use Custom ColorClick Use Custom Color to customize the appearance of the Table component. Click the adjacent color selector buttons to customize the appearance of the following parts of the Table component:• Scroll Bar Color• Scroll Arrow Color• Scroll Gutter ColorFor information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Ticker component

ValueThe options in this area configure the appearance of the value labels for the Ticker component.

Show ValueClick Show Value to display the values on the ticker component.

Numeric FormatFor information on the Numeric Format list, see “Numeric Format” on page 160.

Specific to the Icon component

DisplayShow On/OffClick Show On/Off to have the appearance of the Icon component differ when it is on and when it is off.

Show Custom ColorClick Show Custom Color to customize the appearance of the Icon component. Note: This option is available only when alerts are disabled.

Color FillClick the adjacent color selector button to customize the color of the Icon component.

236 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 237: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab 13

For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

TransparencyFor information of Transparency, see “Transparency” on page 158.

Mouse OverThe options in this area determine the information displayed when the mouse pointer passes over the Icon component. Any combination of the label or value can be displayed, and the information otherwise hidden.

Show LabelsClick Show Labels to display the label when the pointer passes over the Icon component.

Font SettingsFor information on Font Settings, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Show ValuesClick Show Values to display the value when the pointer passes over the Icon component.

Numeric FormatFor information on the Numeric Format list, see “Numeric Format” on page 160.Note: If the application is unable to determine the structure of a format string that was imported from Excel, the Numeric Format parameter is set to From Spreadsheet.

Specific to the List Builder component

Titles buttonButtonThe options in this area configure the appearance of the Button labels for the List Builder component. The following option is available:• Font Settings

For information on Font Settings, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 237

Page 238: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab13

DestinationThe options in this area configure the appearance of the Destination section of the List Builder component. The following options are available:• Title Font Settings

For information on Font Settings, see “Font settings” on page 156.• Label Font Settings

For information on Font Settings, see “Font settings” on page 156.• Mouse Over Text Color

Click the adjacent color selector button to customize the appearance of the text when passed over by the pointerFor information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• Selected Text ColorClick the adjacent color selector button to customize the appearance of the text when selected.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

SourceThe options in this area configure the appearance of the Source section of the List Builder component. The following options are available:• Title Font Settings

For information on Font Settings, see “Font settings” on page 156.• Label Font Settings

For information on Font Settings, see “Font settings” on page 156.• Mouse Over Text Color

Click the adjacent color selector button to customize the appearance of the text when passed over by the pointer.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• Selected Text ColorClick the adjacent color selector button to customize the appearance of the text when selected.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

238 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 239: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab 13

Specific to the Accordion Menu component

TitlesCategory NamesThe options in this area customize the appearance of the Category Names that appear on the Accordion Menu component. The following options are available:• Alignment

Click an option from this list to set the alignment of the category names on the Accordion Menu component. For information on the Alignment list, see “Alignment” on page 159.

• Font SettingsFor information on Font Settings, see “Font settings” on page 156.

• Numeric FormatFor information on the Numeric Format list, see “Numeric Format” on page 160.

Specific to the List View component

Titles buttonHeaderThe options in this area customize the appearance of the header area of the List View component. The following options are available:• Font Settings

For information on Font Settings, see “Font settings” on page 156.• Mouse Over Text

Click the adjacent color selector button to customize the color of the text when passed over by the pointer.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• Selected TextClick the adjacent color selector button to customize the color of the text when selected.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 239

Page 240: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Selector Components ReferenceAppearance tab13

ValueThe options in this area customize the appearance of the Value that appears on the List View component.The following options are available:• Font Settings

For information on Font Settings, see “Font settings” on page 156.• Mouse Over Text

Click the adjacent color selector button to customize the appearance of the text when passed over by the pointer.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• Selected TextClick the adjacent color selector button to customize the appearance of the text when selected.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

240 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 241: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Map Component Reference

chapter

Page 242: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Map Component ReferenceOverview14

Overview

This chapter outlines Properties panel features for the components in the Maps Library folder.

General tabThe features on the General tab link the map component to data in the imported Excel spreadsheet.

Common to all Map componentsThe features in this section apply to all map components.

TitleTo give the map component a title, type the title in the Title box. Alternatively, you can click the Title Cell Selector button, and select a title in the imported spreadsheet. For information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Region NamesRegion Names defines the codes for each region in the map component. These codes are then used by Display Data, Source Data, and Target Data to associate values to the appropriate region parameters. You can specify region codes in one of the following ways:• If you want to use region codes from the imported spreadsheet, click the

Region Names Cell Selector button, and select the region codes in the imported spreadsheet. For information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

• If you want to manually enter region codes, click the Region Names Browse button. In the Region Names dialog box, in the Label Name column, type the region codes. For information on Browse buttons, see “Browse button” on page 163.

Insert OptionThe items on the Insert Option list determine how Xcelsius inserts data for a selected region:• Rows

Xcelsius inserts the relevant data into a row of empty cells.

242 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 243: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Map Component ReferenceGeneral tab 14

• ColumnsXcelsius inserts the relevant data into a column of empty cells.

Source DataThe Source Data Cell Selector button lets you link the source data in the imported spreadsheet to the map component. For information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Insert InThe Insert In Cell Selector button lets you select a range of empty cells in the imported spreadsheet for Xcelsius to insert data into. When a user selects a region on the map component, the relevant data is inserted into the empty cells.If you chose Rows from the Insert Option list, you must select a row of empty cells with the same number of cells as a row in the source data range. If you chose Columns from the Insert Option list, you must select a column of empty cells with the same number of cells as a column in the source data range.For information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Display DataThe Display Data Cell Selector button lets you select the display data for the map component in the imported spreadsheet. When a user selects a region on the map component, the relevant data is displayed.Depending on the layout of the data range, Xcelsius searches for the region codes specified in Region Names in the following ways:• If the data range has two columns and more than two rows, Xcelsius

searches for the codes in the first column of the range. • If the data range has two rows and more than two columns, Xcelsius

searches for the codes in the first row of the range. • If the data range has two columns and two rows, Xcelsius searches the first

row and the first column to determine which one has the most region codes. Xcelsius then uses either the first row or the first column for region codes.

Depending on the location of the region codes, Xcelsius retrieves relevant display data in the following ways: • If the region codes are in the first column, Xcelsius interprets the data to

the right of the region codes as the display data.• If the region codes are in the first row, Xcelsius interprets the data below

the region codes as the display data.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 243

Page 244: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Map Component ReferenceBehavior tab14

For information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Behavior tabThe features on the Behavior tab control how the map component behaves in its interactive format.

Common to all Map componentsThe features in this section apply to all map components.

Sound EnabledThe Sound Enabled check box determines whether the map component makes a sound when a selection is made. If you select Sound Enabled, the map component makes a sound when users select a region. If you clear Sound Enabled, the map component is silent when users select a region.

Update OnThe items on the Update On list determine which action a user must perform to select a region:• Mouse Click

The user must click a region to select it.• Mouse Over

The user must place the pointer over a region to select it.

Dynamic VisibilityFor information about the features in the Dynamic Visibility area, see “Dynamic Visibility” on page 157.

Alerts tabFor information about the features on the Alerts tab, see “Common Alerts Tab features” on page 163.

244 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 245: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Map Component ReferenceAppearance tab 14

Appearance tabThe features on the Appearance tab let you customize the appearance of the map component.

Common to all Map componentsThe features in this section apply to all map components.

Show TitleSelecting the Show Title check box makes the map component title visible, and provides the following options for customizing the appearance of the title:• Position

For information about the Position list, see “Position” on page 159.• X Shift

For information about the X Shift box, see “X Shift” on page 158.• Y Shift

For information about the Y Shift box, see “Y Shift” on page 159.• Font Settings

For information about the features in the Font Settings area, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Show Mouse OverThe Show Mouse Over check box controls whether the region name is displayed when users place their pointers on a region. When you select Show Mouse Over, the Font Settings for the region name become active. For information about the features in the Font Settings area, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Show ValuesThe Show Values check box controls whether a region value appears when users place their pointers on a region in the map component.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 245

Page 246: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Map Component ReferenceAppearance tab14

Region

The options in the Region area let you customize the appearance of the regions in the map component during certain pointer actions:• Default Fill

You can customize the default color for unselected regions and for regions which have no source data.

• TransparencyFor information on the Transparency box, see “Transparency” on page 158.

• Selectable FillYou can customize the color for selectable regions and for regions which have source data.

• Selected FillYou can customize the color for selected regions.

• Mouse Over FillYou can customize the color for regions which users place their pointers on.

To customize a fill color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For information on Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

246 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 247: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Background Component Reference

chapter

Page 248: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Background Component ReferenceOverview15

Overview

This chapter discusses the Properties panel features for the components in the Art & Backgrounds folder.

General tabThe features in this section apply to specific component types.

Common to some componentsThis section applies to the background and image components.

Capture Mouse EventsThe Capture Mouse Events check box uses the background component to prevent users from interacting with other components. This feature only works if, in the design view, the background component has been stacked on top of the other components.If you select Capture Mouse Events, any actions that users perform on the underlying components with their pointers have no effect.If you clear Capture Mouse Events, users can interact with the underlying components.Note: Capture Mouse Events is enabled for imported SWF files even if it is cleared on the General tab.

Specific to Background componentsThe features in this section apply to the following components:• Background-0• Background-1• Background-2• Background-3

Border ScaleThe Border Scale slider lets you adjust the width of the background component’s border. When you drag the pointer to the right, the border becomes thicker. When you drag the pointer to the left, the border becomes thinner.

248 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 249: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Background Component ReferenceGeneral tab 15

Specific to Shape componentsThe features in this section apply to the following components:• Ellipse• Rectangle

Show BordersSelecting the Show Borders check box makes the shape component border visible, and provides the following options for customizing the appearance of the border:• Weight

For information about the Weight box, see “Weight” on page 158.• Transparency

For information about the Transparency box, see “Transparency” on page 158.

• ColorFor information about the Color Selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Fill StyleThe items on the Fill Style list determine the color and shading of the shape component:• Linear

The fill changes from Color 1 to Color 2 as you move from one side of the shape component to the other.

• NoneThe shape component has no fill.

• RadialThe fill changes from Color 1 to Color 2 as you move from the center of the shape component to the edge.

• SolidThe fill is a solid color.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 249

Page 250: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Background Component ReferenceGeneral tab15

Fill Style SettingsClicking linear, radial, or solid on the Fill Style list provides the following options for customizing the appearance of the fill:• Rotation

The Rotation box is available only if you clicked linear on the Fill Style list. You can enter a value from 0 to 360 in the Rotation box to determine the position of the axis where Color 1 and 2 meet.

• Color 1The options in the Color 1 area let you customize the appearance of Color 1 in the shape component:• Color

The Color Selector button lets you select Color 1. For information on Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• TransparencyFor information on the Transparency box, refer to the “Transparency” on page 158.

• PositionThe Position slider determines the color gradient for Color 1. It is available only if you clicked linear or radial on the Fill Style list. If you drag the pointer to the far left, Color 1 changes into Color 2 almost immediately. If you drag the pointer to the far right, Color 1 does not change into Color 2 and fills the entire shape component.

• Color 2The options in the Color 2 area are available only if you clicked linear or radial on the Fill Style list. These options are the same as those for Color 1.

Specific to Line componentsThe features in this section apply to the following components:• Vertical Line• Horizontal Line

Line ColorThe Color Selector button adjacent to Line Color lets you select the color of the line component. For information on Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

250 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 251: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Background Component ReferenceBehavior tab 15

Specific to the Image componentThe features in this section apply to the image component only.Note: The image component supports JPG and SWF files, as well as Xcelsius models. However, it does not support these file types:• Progressive JPG• JPG with CMYK coloring• Nested SWF files

Scale to Image Size on ImportWhen you select the Scale to Image Size on Import check box, the JPG or SWF file you import appears in its actual size. When you clear this check box, Xcelsius scales the imported file to the size of the image component on the canvas.

ImportThe Import button lets you browse for an image file. When you select an image file to import, the file name appears in the Filename box.

Embed FileThe Embed File check box lets you embed a copy of the image file in the Xcelsius model. If you select Embed File, the image file becomes part of the Xcelsius model. If you clear Embed File, Xcelsius loads the image file when the model is viewed in its interactive format.

Show Background ColorThe Show Background Color check box is available only if you imported a SWF file. This check box controls whether the background of the SWF file is displayed in the image component. Selecting Show Background Color makes the SWF file background visible.

Behavior tabFor information about the features in the Dynamic Visibility area, see “Dynamic Visibility” on page 157.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 251

Page 252: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Background Component ReferenceBehavior tab15

252 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 253: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Collaboration Components Reference

chapter

Page 254: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Collaboration Components ReferenceOverview16

Overview

This chapter outlines Properties panel features for the components in the Collaboration Components folder.

General tabThe features in this section apply to specific components.

Specific to the Connection Light componentThe features on the General tab let you customize the appearance of the connection light component.

Use Custom ColorSelecting the Use Custom Color check box provides the following options for customizing the colors that represent the connection status of the connection light component: • Error Color• Default Color• Connect ColorTo customize a color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For information on Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Login componentThe features on the General tab let you choose the login type, and modify the button text, for the login component.

Login optionsYou can choose one of the following login options for the login component:• Username and Password

Users must enter a valid user name and password to log in.• Username

Users must enter a valid user name only to log in.• Password

Users must enter a valid password only to log in.

254 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 255: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Collaboration Components ReferenceGeneral tab 16

Button labelTo enter a button label for the login component, type the label in the Button Label box. Alternatively, you can click the Button Label Cell Selector button and select the login button label in the imported spreadsheet. For information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the People List componentThe features on the General tab let you customize the appearance of the people list component.

LabelThe options in the Label area let you customize how user names appear in the people list component:• Alignment

For information on the Alignment list, see “Alignment” on page 159.• Font Settings

For information on the features in the Font Settings area, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Use Custom ColorSelecting the Use Custom Color check box provides four options for customizing the colors of the people list component:• Background Fill Color• Scroll Bar Color• Scroll Arrow Color• Scroll Gutter ColorTo customize a color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For information on Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Remote Scenario Button componentThe features on the General tab let you modify the label for the remote scenario button component.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 255

Page 256: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Collaboration Components ReferenceBehavior tab16

Label

To enter a label for the remote scenario button component, type the desired label in the Label box. Alternatively, you can click the Label Cell Selector button and select the label in the imported spreadsheet. For information on Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Behavior tabFor information about the features in the Dynamic Visibility area, see “Dynamic Visibility” on page 157.

Appearance tabThe features described in this section apply to the login component and the people list component.

Specific to the Login componentThe features on the Appearance tab let you modify the fonts and background colors used by the login component.

Input FontThe Font Settings under Input Font let you customize the font used for user input. For information about the features in the Font Settings area, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Button FontThe Font Settings under Button Font let you customize the font used for the button label. For information about the features in the Font Settings area, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Selected TextThe Selected Text Color Selector button lets you customize the color the button label text changes to when the user clicks the login button. For information on Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

256 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 257: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Collaboration Components ReferenceAppearance tab 16

Use Custom ColorSelecting the Use Custom Color check box provides the following options for customizing the background colors used by the login component:• Input Color

You can customize the background color of the boxes.• Button Color

You can customize the background color of the button.• Button Down Color

You can customize the background color the login button changes to when it is clicked.

To customize a color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For information on Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Remote Scenario Button componentThe features on the Appearance tab let you customize the text and background for the remote scenario button component.

TextThe following features in the Text area let you customize the appearance of the button label text:• Alignment

For information about the Alignment list, see “Alignment” on page 159.• Font Settings

For information about the features in the Font Settings area, see “Font settings” on page 156.

• Selected TextYou can customize the color the button label text changes to when the button is clicked. For information about Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Show BackgroundThe Show Background check box controls the visibility of the background for the remote scenario button component. When you clear Show Background, only the button label text is visible.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 257

Page 258: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Collaboration Components ReferenceAppearance tab16

Show Custom Color

Selecting the Show Custom Color check box provides the following options for customizing the background color of the remote scenario button component:• Default Fill

You can customize the default background color.• Selected Fill

You can customize the background color the button changes to when it is clicked.

To customize a color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For information on Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

258 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 259: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Text Component Reference

chapter

Page 260: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Text Component ReferenceOverview17

Overview

This chapter discusses the Properties panel features for the components in the Text folder.

General tab

Common to some components

Default Text from Cell (Input Text-0, Input Text-1, Input Text Area)Click Default Text from Cell, and then click the Cell Selector button under Default Text from Cell to select the default text from the spreadsheet.For information about Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Enter TextUse this option to manually enter the default text that will appear when the visualization is run.

Insert on Load (Input Text-0, Input Text-1, Input Text Area)Select the Insert on Load check box to insert the default text into the Insert In cell once the generated application is loaded.

Insert In (Input Text-0, Input Text-1, Input Text Area)Use the Insert In Cell Selector button to select the cell from the spreadsheet into which the text will be inserted.For information about Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to LabelLink to CellUse the Link to Cell Cell Selector button to link the label to a cell in the spreadsheet. Any change to the value of this cell will be reflected in the label. For information about Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

260 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 261: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Text Component ReferenceBehavior tab 17

Behavior tab

Common to some components

Password Input (Input Text-0, Input Text-1)Select the Password Input check box to display typed characters as asterisks (*). This feature can be used to prevent passwords or other sensitive information from being displayed on screen.

Maximum Characters (Input Text-0, Input Text-1, Input Text Area)Select the Maximum Characters check box to limit the user input to the number of characters specified in the Maximum Characters value.When the Maximum Characters check box is enabled, this value sets the maximum number of characters that a user can enter into the label. Enter the desired value in the text box, or use the up/down arrows to adjust the maximum number of characters.

Characters Allowed (Input Text-0, Input Text-1)Use this field to prevent users from entering certain characters into the label. All characters will be allowed if the field is left blank. You can manually enter the number of characters allowed in the Characters Allowed box. Alternatively, you can click the Characters Allowed Cell Selector button to select the value in the spreadsheet. For information about Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.The simplest expression is a single character, such as “a”, which will allow users to enter the letter “a” into the label. Multiple expressions may be concatenated to create larger groups of allowed or not allowed characters. For example, the expression “abc” will allow the letters “a”, “b”, and “c” to be entered into the label by users.The dash (-) can also be used to define a range of characters. The expression “a-z”, for example, defines all lowercase letters.When there are only a few characters that you do not want to be allowed, it is easier to specify those characters instead of all of the allowed characters. This can be done by prefixing the entire field with the caret (^). Every character other than those specified in the field is then allowed. For example, to prevent users from entering numbers, the field could be set to “^0-9”.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 261

Page 262: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Text Component ReferenceBehavior tab17

The caret can also be used throughout the string to switch between allowing and excluding characters. The first time it appears in the field, the characters defined by the expressions that follow it will not be allowed until another caret appears. When a second caret appears, the characters defined by the expressions that follow it will be allowed until another caret appears. For example, setting Characters Allowed to ^0-9^abc^def defines the following:• numbers are not allowed• a, b, and c, are allowed• d, e, and f are not allowedBecause the dash and caret have special meanings, there is a specific way to specify the actual dash and caret as part of the character set. To specify a dash or carat as part of the character set, place a backslash (\) before the special character. for example, a dash is specified by typing “\-” and a caret is specified by typing “\^”. Because the backslash also has a special meaning, a backslash must also be represented by placing a backslash before it.A few common characters sets are shown below: • Whole Numbers (123): “\-0-9” • Real Numbers (1.5): “\-0-9.” • Fractions (1/2): “\-/0-9” • Positive Whole Numbers: “0-9” • Positive Decimal Numbers: “0-9.”• Letters: “a-zA-Z” • Numbers and Letters: “0-9a-zA-Z”

Horizontal Scroll BehaviorThis section lets you define the behavior of the horizontal scroll bar. A horizontal scroll bar can be used to quickly navigate horizontally through text and is useful for displaying long lines of text within a narrow text area.

Enable (Label, Input Text Area)Select this option to attach a horizontal scroll bar to the text area. This scroll bar will always be shown.

Disable (Label, Input Text Area)Select this option when a horizontal scroll bar is unnecessary or not preferred.

262 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 263: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Text Component ReferenceBehavior tab 17

Auto Hide (Label, Input Text Area)Select this option to attach a horizontal scroll bar to the text area. This scroll bar will automatically hide itself when the length of each line fits within the width of the text area.

Vertical Scroll BehaviorThis section lets you define the behavior of the vertical scroll bar. A vertical scroll bar can be used to quickly navigate vertically through text and is useful for displaying several lines of text within a short text area. This option does not apply to input text.

Enable (Label, Input Text Area)Select this option to attach a vertical scroll bar to the text area. This scroll bar will always be shown.\

Disable (Label, Input Text Area)Select this option when a vertical scroll bar is unnecessary or not preferred.

Auto Hide (Label, Input Text Area)Select this option to attach a vertical scroll bar to the text area. This scroll bar will automatically hide itself when the height of all the lines of text fit within the height of the text area.

Dynamic VisibilityFor information about dynamic visibility, see “Dynamic Visibility” on page 157.

Specific to Input Text area

HTMLSelect the HTML check box to render the default text as HTML. The component will parse the default text as if it were HTML code and attempt to render it as an internet browser would. The following HTML tags are supported: a href, b, font color, font face, font size, i, p, u See the HTML reference section in the online help for a description of HTML and the supported tags.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 263

Page 264: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Text Component ReferenceAppearance tab17

Appearance tab

Common to all components

AlignmentFor information about the Alignment list, see “Alignment” on page 159.

FontFor information about font, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Common to some components

Transparency (Input Text-0, Input Text-1, Input Text Area)For information about the Transparency box, see “Transparency” on page 158.

Use Custom Color (Input Text-0, Input Text-1, Input Text Area)When you select the Use Custom Color check box, the following options for customizing the colors of the text component are available:• Background Color

You can customize the color of the text component background.• Scroll Bar Color

You can customize the color of the thumb piece in the scroll bar.• Scroll Arrow Color

You can customize the color of the arrows in the scroll buttons.• Scroll Gutter Color

You can customize the color of the scroll bar gutters.To customize a color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For information about Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Wrap Text (Input Text Area, Label)Select the Wrap Text check box to cause lines of text that are longer than the component width to wrap to the next line of the label. This option does not apply to input text.

264 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 265: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Text Component ReferenceAppearance tab 17

Specific to Label

Numeric FormatFor more information about the Numeric Format list, see “Numeric Format” on page 160.

BackgroundUse the following options to configure the appearance of the label background and borders:• Border

Use this option to specify which sides of the border are currently being adjusted by the Show Border, Border Color, and Weight options. The four sides of the label border - Top, Bottom, Left, and Right - can be adjusted independently by selecting the appropriate side. All four sides can be adjusted simultaneously by selecting All Sides.

• WeightFor information about the Weight box, see “Weight” on page 158.

• Show BorderSelect Show Border to display a border on the label, at the side specified by the Border list. To customize the border color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For information about Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• Show FillSelect the Show Fill check box to display a colored background behind the label. To customize the fill color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For information about Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

TextAlignmentFor information about the Alignment list, see “Alignment” on page 159.

Wrap TextSelect the Wrap Text check box to cause lines of text that are longer than the component width to wrap to the next line of the label. This option does not apply to input text.For more information about font settings, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 265

Page 266: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Text Component ReferenceAppearance tab17

266 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 267: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Web Connectivity Component Reference

chapter

Page 268: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Web Connectivity Component ReferenceOverview18

Overview

This chapter discusses Properties panel features for the components in the Web Connectivity folder.

General Tab

Common to some components

Label Use this option to set the label that will appear on the button. Type in the Label box, or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the label for the component.For more information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162. Note: This option applies to all the Web Connectivity components but the External Slide Show component.

URL Use this option to enter the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) link for the button. A URL is also referred to as a Web address. Type in the URL box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the URL for the component. In the generated visualization, the URL associated with the button will update as the selected cell value changes. With this functionality, you can create one button that will link to many different pages depending on the state of the visualization.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: • “http://” is required for all URLs.• The options in this section apply only to the following Web components:

• URL Link Button• XML Data Button

268 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 269: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Web Connectivity Component ReferenceGeneral Tab 18

Specific to the External Slide Show component

URL (JPEG or SWF file)Use this option enter the button label. Type in the URL box or click on the URL cell selector button to select the URL for the slide show. When the URL is bound to a spreadsheet cell, changes to the value of the cell will cause the Slide Show to load the image at the URL specified in the cell. For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: Progressive JPGs and JPGs with CMYK coloring (as opposed to the standard RGB coloring) are not supported.Once the image has been loaded, the Slide Show will transition to the image using the defined transition parameters.

Specific to URL Link Button component

Window OptionsUse the options in this section to choose where the link should be opened when the URL Link button is clicked.

New WindowSelect this option to open the link in a new browser window.

This WindowSelect this option to open the link in the same browser window. The current contents of the window will be replaced.

Specific to Web Service Connector component

WSDLSelect Web Service buttonClick this button to display a popup window to configure the WSDL bindings for the Web Service Connector component. When you click this button, the following options are displayed:• WSDL URL field

Enter the URL for the WSDL that you would like to bind the component to.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 269

Page 270: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Web Connectivity Component ReferenceGeneral Tab18

• Submit buttonClick on the Submit button to bind the component to the WSDL that was entered into the WSDL URL text box.

• MethodsSelect the method that you would like to bind the Web Service Connector component to.

• Input Message The input arguments for the selected method will be displayed here.

• Output Message The return values for the selected method will be displayed here.

WSDL MappingsUse this section to map the input and return values for the selected WSDL to the spreadsheet. For a more detailed overview of how the Web Service Connector Component works please see “Sample visualization: Web Service Option” on page 80.

Input Values Select a node from the tree to bind the node to the spreadsheet. Selecting a node enables the Input Value selection icon.

Return ValuesSelect a node from the tree to bind the node to the spreadsheet. Selecting a node enables the Return Value selection icon.

Specific to XML Data button

SendUse the options in this section to edit the ranges that are translated to XML and sent to the URL. The translated ranges are sent through HTTP using the POST method.

270 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 271: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Web Connectivity Component ReferenceGeneral Tab 18

The Name and Range parameters apply to the range that is selected (indicated by a blue highlight) in the Ranges list box.

Enable SendSelect this check box to send the Send Ranges in XML format to the URL when the button is triggered.

Ranges Select a range in the list box to edit the data for that range.

AddUse the Add button to add a new range to be sent.

RemoveUse the Remove button to remove a range from the list and keep it from being sent to the URL. The range that is selected (indicated by a blue highlight) in the Ranges list box will be removed.

Name Type in the Name box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the name for the selected range.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

RangeClick the Range cell selector button to select the range from the imported spreadsheet.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

LoadUse the options in this section to edit the ranges that the return XML will load into.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 271

Page 272: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Web Connectivity Component ReferenceGeneral Tab18

The Name and Range parameters apply to the range that is selected (indicated by a blue highlight) in the Ranges list box.

Enable LoadSelect this check box to load the XML data at the URL into the Load Ranges when the button is triggered.

RangesSelect a range in the list box to edit the data for that range.

AddUse the Add button to add a new range to receive return XML.

RemoveUse the Remove button to remove a range from the list. The range that is selected (indicated by a blue highlight) in the Ranges list box will be removed.

Name Type in the Name box or click the adjacent cell selector button to select the name for the selected range.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

RangeClick the Range cell selector button to select the range from the imported spreadsheet.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Preview XML Use the Preview XML button to see the structure of the XML that your visualization needs to receive from the external data source.

Specific to XML Map Refresh component

XML MapsUse this option to configure which XML Maps will be refreshed when the user clicks on the XML Map Refresh button.Check the box next to the XML Maps that should be refreshed when the user clicks on the XML Map Refresh button. In the above example only the Customers and Employees maps will be refreshed when the user clicks on the button.

272 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 273: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Web Connectivity Component ReferenceBehavior tab 18

Specific to LiveOffice connector

Live Office Web Services URLUse this field to enter the location of the Live Office Web Services that the visualization will use to connect to Live Office data.

Live Office ConnectionsViewsThe Views area lists the Live Office Views that are used as data sources in the XLF file.

RangesThe Ranges area lists the Excel ranges that can be selected for refresh in the XLF file. The ranges are split into headings and data grid.Click the Cell Selector button below the Ranges area to select a different range of cells to refresh.For information on the cell selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Behavior tab

Common to All components

Dynamic VisibilityFor detailed information about Dynamic Visibility, see “Dynamic Visibility” on page 157.

Common to some components

Refresh on Load (All but External Slide Show, Live Office Connector)Select this check box to refresh the data once the generated application is loaded.Note: This option applies to all the Web Connectivity components except the following:• External Slide Show• LiveOffice Connector

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 273

Page 274: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Web Connectivity Component ReferenceBehavior tab18

Refresh on Interval

Select this check box to automatically refresh the data at a given interval. The interval is specified by the Refresh Interval.Note: This option applies to all the Web Connectivity components except the following:• External Slide Show• LiveOffice Connector

Refresh Interval Use this option to adjust the time (in seconds) between each automatic refresh. Enter the desired value.Note: This option applies to all the Web Connectivity components except the following:• External Slide Show• LiveOffice Connector

Trigger Cell Note: The options in this section apply to all the Web Connectivity components except the External Slide Show component.Use this option to select a cell from the spreadsheet that can trigger the URL button. This feature allows another action within the visualization, such as a List Box selection, to trigger the button - as if the button itself was pressed. The button is triggered when the value of the underlying Trigger Cell has changed.

Trigger on Any Insert The URL button is triggered anytime a component inserts into the underlying Trigger Cell.

Trigger on Change OnlyThe URL button is triggered when the value of the underlying Trigger Cell has changed.

Specific to External Slide Show component

Slide Show BehaviorUse the parameters in this section to control the timing and style of the transition.

274 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 275: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Web Connectivity Component ReferenceAppearance tab 18

Ease Type Use this option to set the easing behavior of the transition. The following options are available:• Slow In

The transition will begin slowly and accelerate as it progresses.• Slow Out

The transition will begin quickly and slow down as it progresses.• Slow In and Out

The transition will begin slowly and increase in speed until the middle of the transition. The transition will then decelerate until it is finished.

Transition Type Use this option to set the style of the transition between each slide.

Interval Time Use this option to set the amount of time in between each frame of the animation. Enter the desired value in the text box, or use the up/down arrows to adjust the time. Note: A smaller number is better for smoother transitions, while a larger number may be better for performance.

Appearance tab

Common to Some components

Position .For detailed information about this option, see “Position” on page 159.Note: This option applies only to the following Web Connectivity components:• Web Service Connector• XML Data Button• XML Map Refresh• LiveOffice Connector

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 275

Page 276: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Web Connectivity Component ReferenceAppearance tab18

Font

.For detailed information about this option, see “Font settings” on page 156.Note: This option does not apply to the External Slide Show component.

Selected Text Click the Selected Text color selector button to set the color of the label when the button is pressed.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option does not apply to the External Slide Show component.

Transparency .For detailed information about this option, see “Transparency” on page 158.Note: This option does not apply to the External Slide Show component.

Use Custom Color Use this option to customize the color of various parts of a component.Note: This option does not apply to the External Slide Show component.

Default Fill Click the Default Fill color selector button to change the background color of the button in its default state.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option does not apply to the External Slide Show component.

Selected Fill Click the Selected Fill color selector button to change the background color of the button when it is clicked. For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.Note: This option does not apply to the External Slide Show component.

276 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 277: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Web Connectivity Component ReferenceAppearance tab 18

Specific to External Slide Show component

TransparencyFor detailed information about this option, see “Transparency” on page 158.

Horizontal AlignmentUse this option to define how images are horizontally aligned to the bounds of the Slide Show. Choose from the following: options• Left

The image is aligned to the left edge of the Slide Show.• Center

The image is centered horizontally within the Slide Show.• Right

The image is aligned to the right edge of the Slide Show.

Vertical AlignmentUse this option to define how images are vertically aligned to the bounds of the Slide Show. Choose from the following: • Top - The image is aligned to the top edge of the Slide Show.• Center - The image is centered vertically within the Slide Show.• Bottom - The image is aligned to the bottom edge of the Slide Show.

SizingUse this option to define how images are sized within the bounds of the Slide Show.

Default The image is shown at its actual size. Areas of the image that extend outside of the Slide Show are not shown.

StretchThe image is stretched to fit the bounds of the Slide Show.

UniformThe image is sized to the extents of the Slide Show bounds while still maintaining its aspect ratio.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 277

Page 278: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Web Connectivity Component ReferenceAppearance tab18

Specific to URL Link Button component

AlignmentFor detailed information about this option, see “Alignment” on page 159.

Show backgroundSelect the Show Background check box to show a background with the URL link button. By clearing the Show Background check box, you can create a text-only link. You can also clear the check box and place the transparent URL button over an imported image to create a custom URL link button.

Show Custom ColorSelect the Show Custom Color check box to specify colors for the URL Link Button.

Default FillClick the Color Selector button adjacent to Default Fill to specify a color for the URL Link Button background.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Selected FillClick the Color Selector button adjacent to Selected Fill to specify a color for the URL Link Button background when it is clicked.For information on the color selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

278 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 279: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Other Components Reference

chapter

Page 280: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceOverview19

Overview

This chapter discusses Properties panel features for the components in the Selectors folder.

General tabCommon to some components

TitleThis feature lets you set the title for the selected component. Use the Title box to manually enter the title for the component.Alternatively, you can use the Title Cell Selector button to select the title from the spreadsheet. When the title is bound to the spreadsheet, changes to the value of the underlying spreadsheet cell will be reflected in the button label. For more information about Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This area applies to the following components only:

• Interactive Calendar• Grid• Panel Set

LabelUse the Label text box to manually enter the button label. You can also use the Label Cell Selector button to select the button label from the spreadsheet. When the label is bound to the spreadsheet, changes to the value of the spreadsheet cell will be reflected in the button label. For more information about Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.Note: This area applies to the following components only:

• Local Scenario Buttons• FSCommand Button

280 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 281: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceGeneral tab 19

Specific to the Interactive Calendar component

Insert DataUse the options in this section to define how the Interactive Calendar component will behave when a selection is made.

Insert OptionUse this option to specify the structure of the data inserted when a selection is made.

Insert Source Data inUse this option to select the cell into which the day or date from the Interactive calendar will be inserted. For information about Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Grid component

Link to CellUse this option to select all data for the grid from the spreadsheet. The grid displays a value for each cell selected, and arranges them in the same order as the selection. Any change to the values of these cells is reflected in the corresponding grid values. Similarly, any change to the grid values is reflected across all other components linked to the corresponding cells.

Specific to FSCommand button

FS CommandFor detailed information about FSCommand, see the Macromedia Flash support site at http://www.macromedia.com/support/flash/action_scripts/actionscript_dictionary/actionscript_dictionary372.html

CommandUse the Command field to type a command for the FSCommand, or use the Cell Selector button to select a command in the spreadsheet. For more information about Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 281

Page 282: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceGeneral tab19

ParametersUse the Parameter field to type a parameter value for the FSCommand, or use the Cell Selector button to select a value in the spreadsheet. For more information about Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to Trend Icon-0 and Trend Icon-1

DataUse the Data section to set the Data parameter for the Trend Icon. The value of the Data parameter determines which icon is displayed for the component: Use the Data text box to manually enter the data value for the component.You can also use the Cell Selector button to select the data value from the spreadsheet. For more information about Cell Selector buttons, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Use Custom ColorSelect the Use Custom Color check box to customize the colors for the various states of the trend icon. The following options for customizing colors are available:• Positive Value Color

You can customize the color the trend icon changes to when its data value is greater than zero.

• Value is Zero Color You can customize the color the trend icon changes to when its data value is equal to zero.

• Negative Value ColorYou can customize the color the trend icon changes to when its data value is less than zero.

To customize a color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For information about Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Local Scenario Buttons component

LabelUse the Label text box to manually enter the button label.

282 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 283: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceGeneral tab 19

You can also use the Label Cell Selector button to select the button label from the spreadsheet. When the label is bound to the spreadsheet, changes to the value of the spreadsheet cell will be reflected in the button label. For more information about the Cell Selector button, see “Cell Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Panel Set component

LayoutUse the Layout option to select what you would like your panel to look like. There are a variety of layouts to choose from.

Title BarsShow Title BarsThis check box determines whether a title appears on each frame of the Panel Set component.• Titles

You can use the Browse button or the Cell Selector button to indicate what title you want to appear for each frame on the Panel. If you use the Brown button you can type in the title manually. If you select the Cell Selector button, you can link the title to a cell in your Excel spreadsheet.

ContentPanelUse the Panel list to select a panel to link objects to. Whatever panel you select here will take the characteristics that you specify in the content section.

Use JPGs or SWFs• Embedded

Use the Embedded option to link a SWF file or JPEG to the Panel directly from your computer or a network location. Click the Import button adjacent to the Embedded option to navigate to your files.

• URLUse the URL option to enter a URL location for the JPEG or SWF file that you want to link to the panel.

• Labels

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 283

Page 284: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceBehavior tab19

Use the Labels option to add a label to some or all of the objects that you link to a particular panel. If you use the Brown button you can type in the label manually. If you select the Cell Selector button, you can link the label to a cell in your Excel spreadsheet.

Behavior tab

Common to All components

Dynamic VisibilityFor detailed information about Dynamic Visibility, see “Dynamic Visibility” on page 157.

Specific to the Interactive Calendar component

Calendar Defaults and RangesUse this set of options to control the sound, default date and date range for the Interactive Calendar component.

Sound EnabledCheck the Sound Enabled box to enable sound for the selected component.

Use Current Date Use this option to control the default date for the Interactive Calendar component. Selecting this option means that the Interactive Calendar component will always load with the current date. Unselecting this option requires you to enter a default data and enables the Default Month, Default Year and Default Day entry fields.• Default Month

Use this option to specify the default Month for the Interactive Calendar component.

• Default Year Use this option to specify the default Year for the Interactive Calendar component.

• Default Day Use this option to specify the default Day for the Interactive Calendar component.

284 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 285: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceBehavior tab 19

Use Calendar Limits Use this option to control the date range for the Interactive Calendar component. Selecting this option requires you to specify the scroll range and enables the Start Month, Start Year, End Month and End Year entry fields. Unselecting this option means that the Interactive Calendar component will allow the user to scroll through all dates.

Start Month Use this option to specify the Start Month for the Interactive Calendar component.

Start Year Use this option to specify the Start Year for the Interactive Calendar component.

End Month Use this option to specify the End Month for the Interactive Calendar component.

End Year Use this option to specify the End Year for the Interactive Calendar component.

Specific to the Grid component

Scale BehaviorUse the options in this section to define the behavior of lower and upper limits. These limits are applied to every item in the grid. Limits can be used to prevent the user from manually setting the grid items to certain values.

Lower Limit BehaviorUse this option to set the Lower Limit Behavior for the component. Choose from the following:• Fixed - The user cannot set the grid items to values less than the

Minimum Value.• Open - The user can set the grid items to any value that does not conflict

with the Upper Limit.

Upper Limit BehaviorUse this option to set the Upper Limit Behavior for the component. Choose from the following: • Fixed - The user cannot set the grid items to values greater than the

Maximum Value.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 285

Page 286: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceBehavior tab19

• Open - The user can set the grid items to any value that does not conflict with the Lower Limit.

Minimum ValueMinimum Value is the Lower Limit and is available only when the Lower Limit Behavior is fixed. Enter the desired value in the text box, or use the up/down arrows to adjust the value.

Maximum ValueMaximum Value is the Upper Limit and is available only when the Upper Limit Behavior is fixed. Enter the desired value in the text box, or use the up/down arrows to adjust the value.

IncrementGrid item values that are manually set are rounded to the Increment number, allowing restricted input for quantities that require specific increments, such as dozens.Numbers can also be made more readable by using the Increment to round to a specific digit. Enter the desired value in the text box, or use the up/down arrows to adjust the value.

Play OptionsShow Play ButtonThe Show Play Button check box controls the visibility of the play button for the component.

Auto RewindThe Auto Rewind check box controls whether the play sequence for the component automatically rewinds when the Xcelsius visualization is run in its interactive format.

Auto ReplayThe Auto Replay check box controls whether the play sequence for the component automatically replays when the Xcelsius visualization is run in its interactive format.

Sound EnabledSelect the Sound Enabled check box to enable sound for the component.

286 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 287: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceBehavior tab 19

Interaction OptionsInput Disabled Check Input Disabled to disable runtime manipulation of the values in the grid. Note: Regardless of this option, input is disabled for all grid items linked to Excel cells with formulas.

Mouse Sensitivity Use this setting to determine how sensitive the value of the component is to pointer movements. Higher sensitivity settings are beneficial when the value of the component needs to span a large range, while lower settings permit more granular manipulation of the value.

Scroll Behavior Use the Scroll Behavior options to specify how users will adjust the values of the component. • Manual: The value of the cells will be controlled by manually dragging the

mouse. When the mouse is dragged up or down, the value is adjusted by an amount approximate to the distance dragged. Dragging up increases the value of the component. Dragging down decreases the value of the component.

• Automatic: The value of the cells will be controlled by dragging and holding the mouse above or below the cell. The value will automatically and continually be adjusted as long as the mouse button remains down. If the mouse is above the cell, the value increases. If the mouse is below the cell, the value decreases. The farther away the mouse is from the value display, the faster the value will change.

Specific to the FSCommand button

Refresh OptionsRefresh on LoadSelect this check box to refresh the data once the generated application is loaded.

Refresh on IntervalSelect this check box to automatically refresh the data at a given interval. The interval is specified by the Refresh Interval.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 287

Page 288: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceBehavior tab19

Refresh IntervalUse this option to adjust the time (in seconds) between each automatic refresh. Enter the desired value.

Trigger BehaviorTrigger CellUse this option to select a cell from the spreadsheet that can trigger the URL button. This feature allows another action within the visualization, such as a List Box selection, to trigger the button - as if the button itself was pressed. The button is triggered when the value of the underlying Trigger Cell has changed.There are two options for when the spreadsheet should trigger the button.

Trigger on Any InsertThe URL button is triggered anytime a component inserts into the underlying Trigger Cell.

Trigger on Change OnlyThe URL button is triggered when the value of the underlying Trigger Cell has changed.

Specific to the Panel Set component

Behavior OptionsMaximized EnabledSelect this option to allow the user to expand a single Panel so that it covers the other panels and then minimize it again so it returns to it’s original size. This feature is useful when you want to emphasize different sets of data at different times during a presentation.

Range OptionsIgnore End BlanksClick Ignore End Blanks to prevent all of the empty values past the last non-empty value from being displayed in the Panel set component. This allows a variable amount of data to be displayed in the Panel Set component.

288 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 289: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceAppearance tab 19

Default OptionsPanelSelect which panel you want to set the default option for.

Default SelectionSelect which file you want to appear in the panel you selected when the visualization is launched.

Slide BehaviorFrictionAdjust the Friction scale to control the friction of the panel behavior as the user selects different files to appear in each panel.

Appearance tab

Common to some components

Show TitleThis option controls the visibility of the title for the selected component. When you select the Show Title check box, the following options for customizing the appearance of the title become available:• Position

.For information about this option, see “Position” on page 159.• X Shift

For information about this option, see “X Shift” on page 158.• Y Shift

For information about this option, see “Y Shift” on page 159.• Font Settings

For information about this option, see “Font settings” on page 156.Note: Show Title applies to the following components only:

• Interactive Calendar• Grid• Panel Set

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 289

Page 290: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceAppearance tab19

Specific to the Interactive Calendar component

TitlesMonthWith the following options, you can configure the appearance of the month label for the selected component:• Position

For information about the Position list, see “Position” on page 159.• Font Settings

For information about the Font Settings area, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Day of the Week• Position

For information about the Position list, see “Position” on page 159.• Font Settings

For information about the Font Settings area, see “Font settings” on page 156.

DateWith the options in this section you can configure the appearance of the date labels for the selected component:• Position

For information about this option, see “Position” on page 159.• Font Settings

For information about this option, see “Font settings” on page 156.

LayoutUse the options in this section to configure the appearance of the Interactive Calendar component. Use the Color Selector button adjacent to each of the options listed here to change its color.

Use Custom ColorYou can customize colors for the following parts and states of the Interactive Calendar component:• Cell Default • Cell Over

290 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 291: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceAppearance tab 19

• Cell Select • Day Fill • Day • Month • Arrow Default • Button Default • Arrow Down • Button Down • Disabled Arrow • Disabled ButtonTo customize a color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For information about Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Grid component

TitlesValueUse the options in this section to configure the appearance of the value label for the selected component.• Position

For information about this option, see “Position” on page 159.• Font Settings

For information about this option, see “Font settings” on page 156.

LayoutUse Custom ColorWhen you select the Use Custom Color check box, the following option for customizing the color of the grid component becomes available:• Fill ColorTo customize a color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For more information about Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 291

Page 292: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceAppearance tab19

Grid SpacingUse the options in this section to control the amount of space between the grid cells:• Vertical Spacing

Vertical Spacing determines the amount of spacing above and below each value of the grid. Enter the desired vertical spacing in the text box, or use the up/down arrows to adjust the value.

• Horizontal SpacingHorizontal Spacing determines the amount of spacing to the left and right of each value of the grid. Enter the desired horizontal spacing in the text box, or use the up/down arrows to adjust the value.

Specific to the FSCommand Button component

LabelUse the following options in the Label area to customize the appearance of the label:• Position

For information about this option, see “Position” on page 159.• Font

For information about this option, see “Font settings” on page 156.• Selected Text

Use the Color Selector button adjacent to Selected Text to specify what color you want the button label text to be when the button is clicked by the user. For more information about the Color Selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

BackgroundTransparencyFor information about this option, see “Transparency” on page 158.

Use Custom ColorSelect Use Custom Color to specify a color for the FSCommand button background:• Default Fill

You can customize the default color for the FSCommand button.

292 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 293: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceAppearance tab 19

• Selected FillYou can customize the color for the FSCommand button when it is clicked.

To customize a color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For more information about Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Local Scenario Buttons component

TextUse the following options to customize the appearance of text in the component:• Alignment

For information about this option, see “Alignment” on page 159.• Font Settings

For detailed information about this option, see “Font settings” on page 156

• Selected TextUse the Color Selector button adjacent to Selected Text to specify what color you want the button label text to be when the button is clicked by the user. For more information about the Color Selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

BackgroundUse the parameters in this section to customize the appearance of the button label.

Show Background This option controls the visibility of the button background.

Show Custom ColorSelect the Show Custom Color check box to customize colors for the following parts of the component:• Default Fill

You can customize the default color of the button. • Selected Fill

You can customize the color the button changes to when it is clicked.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 293

Page 294: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceAppearance tab19

To customize a color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For more information about Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

Specific to the Panel Set component

TitlesShow TitleThe Show Title check box controls the visibility of the component title. When you select Show Title, the following options for customizing the appearance of the title become available:• Position

For information about this option, see “Position” on page 159.• X Shift

For information about this option, see “X Shift” on page 158.• Y Shift

For information about this option, see “Y Shift” on page 159.• Font

For information about this option, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Title Bar LabelsThe following options let you customize the appearance of the title bar labels:• Alignment

For information about this option, see “Alignment” on page 159.• Font

For information about this option, see “Font settings” on page 156.

Drop-down LabelsThe following options let you customize the appearance of the drop-down labels:• Alignment

For information about this option, see “Alignment” on page 159.• Font

For information about this option, see “Font settings” on page 156.

294 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 295: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceAppearance tab 19

• Mouse Over Text Use the adjacent Color Selector button to specify the color text appears when a user mouses over it. For information about Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

• Selected Text Use the adjacent Color Selector button to specify the color text appears when a user selects it. For information about Color Selector buttons, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

LayoutTransparencyYou can use the Transparency box to set the background transparency. For information about this option, see “Transparency” on page 158.

Use Custom ColorWhen you select the Use Custom Color check box, the following options for customizing the colors of parts of the component are available:• Background

• Panel ColorYou can customize the color of the panel backgrounds.

• Backing ColorYou can customize the overall background color.

• Title Bar ColorYou can customize the color of the Panel title bars.

• Button• Default Background

You can customize the background color for he arrow button that enables you to switch between objects within a panel, and the maximize button.

• Default SymbolYou can customize the color of the icons on the arrow and maximize buttons.

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 295

Page 296: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Other Components ReferenceAppearance tab19

• Selected BackgroundYou can customize the color the button background changes to when the button is clicked.

• Selected SymbolYou can customize the color the icons on the arrow and maximize buttons changes to when these buttons are clicked.

• Label Background• Default

You can customize the color of the label background.• Mouse Over

You can customize the color the label background changes to when a user mouses over a label.

• SelectedYou can customize the color the label background changes to when a user clicks the label.

• Scroll Bar• Bar Color

You can customize the color of the scroll bars.• Gutter Color

You can customize the color of the scroll bar gutters.• Arrow Color

You can customize the color of the scroll bar arrows.To customize a color, click the adjacent Color Selector button. For information about the Color Selector button, see “Color Selector button” on page 162.

296 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 297: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Supported Excel Functions

chapter

Page 298: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Supported Excel FunctionsSupported Excel Functions20

Supported Excel Functions

This chapter contains a list of the Microsoft Excel functions that Xcelsius supports.

Supported Excel Functions

ABS ACOS ACOSHAND ASIN ASINHATAN ATAN2 ATANHAVEDEV AVERAGE AVERAGEACEILING CHOOSE COMBINCONCATENATE COS COSHCOUNT COUNTA COUNTIFDATE DATEVALUE DAVERAGEDAY DAYS360 DBDCOUNT DCOUNTA DDBDEGREES DEVSQ DGETDMAX DMIN DOLLARDPRODUCT DSTDEV DSTDEVPDSUM DVAR DVARPEDATE EOMONTH EQUALSEVEN EXP EXPONDISTFACT FALSE FISHERFISHERINV FIXED FLOORFORECAST FV GEOMEANHARMEAN HLOOKUP HOURIF INDEX INTINTERCEPT IPMT IRRISBLANK KURT LARGELN LOG LOG10MATCH MAX MEDIANMIN MINUTE MIRR

298 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 299: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Supported Excel FunctionsSupported Excel Functions 20

MOD MODE MONTHNETWORKDAYS NORMDIST NORMINVNORMDIST NORMSINV NOTNOW NPER NPVODD OR PIPMT POWER PPMTPRODUCT PV RADIANSRAND RATE ISBLANKROUND ROUNDDOWN ROUNDUPSECOND SIGN SINSINH SLN SMALLSQRT STANDARDIZE STDEVSUM SUMIF SUMPRODUCTSUMSQ SUMX2MY2 SUMX2PY2SUMXMY2 SYD TANTANH TEXT TIMETIMEVALUE TODAY TRUETRUNC VALUE VARVDB VLOOKUP WEEKDAYWEEKNUM WORKDAY YEARYEARFRAC

Supported Excel Functions

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 299

Page 300: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Supported Excel FunctionsSupported Excel Functions20

300 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 301: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Index

AAccordion Menu component 48Accordion Menu, sample visualization 54addresults.aspx 90, 94Adobe PDF, exporting visualizations to 111alerts 78

Alerts tabchart components 179features on 163map components 244selector components 223

sample visualization 78Alignment list 159Appearance tab

chart components 179collaboration components 256map components 245other components 289selector components 224text components 264web connectivity components 275

area chart 42art and background components 59

Bbackground components 59

Behavior tab 251General tab 248

backup files, creating 29bar chart 42Behavior tab

background components 251chart components 174collaboration components 256Dynamic Visibility 157

map components 244other components 284selector components 216text components 261web connectivity components 273

Browse button 163bubble chart 42BusinessObjects Enterprise

exporting SWF files 139opening XLF files 138refreshing SWF files 141rights 144saving XLF files 137viewing SWF files 140

BusinessObjects Enterprise, exporting visualizations to 114

Ccaching issues, Internet Explorer 82

client solution 83server solution 82

candlestick chart 42canvas

fitting to components 24placing components on 23resizing 24

Cell Selector button 162changing

canvas size 24fonts 25global styles 106

chart components 42Alerts tab 179Appearance tab 179Behavior tab 174

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 301

Page 302: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Index

creating 44, 44Drill Down tab 171General tab 168types 42

Check Box component 48collaboration applications 101collaboration components 62

Appearance tab 256Behavior tab 256collaboration applications 101configuring 100Flash Communication Server application 101Flash Communication Server, configuring 100General tab 254

Color Selector button 162column chart 42combination chart 42Combo Box component 48components

hiding with Object Browser 19selecting with Object Browser 18

Components Explorer 21navigating 21

configuringcollaboration components 100Flash Communication Server 100XML Data Button component 89

connection light 62creating

backup files 29charts 44collaboration applications 101Flash Communication Server application 101global styles 106templates 104visualizations 34

importing Excel files 34selecting data sources 34

Crystal Reports Serverexporting SWF files 139opening XLF files 138refreshing SWF files 141

rights 144saving XLF files 137viewing SWF files 140

Crystal Reports Server, exporting visualizations to 114

Crystal reports, unmanaged 133Crystal Xcelsius

creating backup files in 29how it works 13importing Excel files into 13importing XLF files from previous versions 12new features 10supported Excel functions 298tools 18using XML maps in 39

Ddata comparison presentation, example 17data selection, maximum rows 27data sources

dynamic 30refreshing 151refreshing, troubleshooting 151selecting 34static 31updating 36

debugging SWF files, sample 99debugging XML visualizations 98deleting components 19dial component 46display status, sample visualization 75drill down chart, sample visualization 45Drill Down tab, chart components 171dynamic data sources 30Dynamic Visibility 157

functionality 74sample visualization 74

dynamic web query option 79

Eellipse component 59

302 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 303: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Index

emailing visualizations 112embedded fonts 25Enterprise

exporting SWF files 139opening XLF files 138refreshing SWF files 141rights 144saving XLF files 137viewing SWF files 140

Excelfrequently asked questions 148functions, supported 152linked Excel files 153macros 154regional formats, supported 153Server Busy message 150

Excel filesimporting 13linked 153maximum size of 153multiple files in visualization 38re-importing 36using another 38XML maps 39

Excel functions, supported 298Export Settings 36exporting visualizations

to Adobe PDF 111to BusinessObjects Enterprise 114to Crystal Reports Server 114to Flash 110to HTML 110to portals 112to PowerPoint 111, 149to Word 113with Outlook 112

external filesembedding 61nested 61

FFilter component 48

Filter component, sample visualization 51Fish-Eye Picture Menu component 48fit canvas to components 24fit canvas to window 24Flash

exporting visualizations to 110slow run time 150

Flash Communication Server application, creating 101

Flash Communication Server, configuring 100Flash Player settings 66Flash variables, using to update visualization 85Font Options 25Font Settings 156format

regional 153Replace Data Selection 148scientific 149table component vs. spreadsheet 148

Format menu 27Align 27Center in Document 28Make Same Size 27other commands 28Space Evenly 27

FS command button 62

Ggauge component 46General tab

background components 248chart components 168collaboration components 254map components 242other components 280selector components 210text components 260web connectivity components 268

global styles 31, 105changing 106creating 106transferring 107

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 303

Page 304: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Index

grid component 62sample visualization 66

grid tool 28grouping components, with Object Browser 19

Hhiding components, with Object Browser 19horizontal line component 59HTML, exporting visualizations to 110

IIcon component 48ignore end blanks 77

sample visualization 77image component 59

embedding external files 61how to use 60nested external files 61

Import Model 25, 34, 36importing Excel files 13, 34Information button 163InfoView

refreshing outside 143refreshing SWF files 141viewing SWF files 140

input text area component 67installation, frequently asked questions 148interactive calendar 62interface, Crystal Xcelsius 18international settings 152Internet Explorer, caching issues 82

client solution 83server solution 82

LLabel Based Menu component 48label component 67line chart 42linking data sources 34List Box component 48List Builder component 48

List Builder, sample visualization 52List View component 48Live Office

parameters 136Xcelsius visualization data source 134

LiveOffice Connectormaking a refreshable visualization 134passing parameters to Excel 137updating web service setting 145

LiveOffice connector 68load selection, XML Data Button component 94LoadPreview.xml 94local scenario buttons component 62

using 65login component 62

MMacromedia Flash, installation 148map components 57

Alerts tab 244Appearance tab 245as display component 57as selector components 57Behavior tab 244General tab 242how they work 57sample visualization 58

maximum rows 27, 152

Nnested external files 61non-embedded fonts 25non-standard characters, supported 154Numeric Format list 160

OObject Browser 18

context menu 18deleting components with 19grouping components in 19hiding components 19

304 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 305: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Index

renaming components in 20selecting components in 18

OHLC chart 42opening Properties panel 20other components 62

Appearance tab 289Behavior tab 284General tab 280

Outlook, emailing visualizations with 112

Ppanel set 62parameters, from Crystal Xcelsius to Live Office

136people list 62pie chart 42play button 46Play Selector component 48Plumtree portals, exporting visualizations to 112Position list 159PowerPoint

exporting visualizations to 111frequently asked questions 149

previewing visualizations 29, 35printing visualizations 150progress bar 46Properties panel 22

for multiple components 23opening 20tabs 22

publishing visualizations. See exporting visualizations

Rradar chart 42Radio Button component 48real-time sharing 100receive selection, XML Data Button component 90rectangle component 59refresh

manual 142

on interval 142on load 142on trigger behavior 143SWF files inside Infoview 141SWF files outside InfoView 143

re-importing Excel file with renamed sheet 37re-importing Excel files 36remote scenario buttons component 62, 104renamed spreadsheets, re-importing 148renaming components, with Object Browser 20Replace Data Selection 148Reporting Services 118Reporting Services Button 118

Ssample visualizations

accordion menu component 54display status 75drill down chart 45Dynamic Visibility 74filter component 51grid component 66ignore end blanks 77list builder component 52map component 58single value using alerts 78sliding picture menu 55status list 75value component 48viewing in Xcelsius 29web service connector 69web service option 80XML Data Button component 88

samplesdebugging SWF files 99script to set Use WebService Option URL 84

saved scenarios, location of 149selecting data sources 34selector components 48

Alerts tab 223Appearance tab 224Behavior tab 216

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 305

Page 306: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Index

General tab 210send data, XML Data Button component 94send selection, XML Data Button component 89SendPreview.xml 90Server Busy message 150Sharepoint 124, 126, 126, 127, 127

deploy Crystal Xcelsius visualizations 124Sharepoint Consumer Component 126Sharepoint Param Component 127Sharepoint Provider Component 127Xcelsius Client 126

single value components 46fixed 149input 47output 47

skins 60slider component 46Sliding Picture Menu component 48Sliding Picture Menu, sample visualization 55snapshots 115Source Data component 48spinner component 46spreadsheets. See Excel filesSQL Server Reporting Services 118stacked charts, types 42starting visualizations, troubleshooting 151static data sources 31status list, sample visualization 75supported features

Excel functions 298non-standard characters 154regional formats 153

TTable component 48templates 31

creating 104text components 67

Appearance tab 264Behavior tab 261General tab 260

Ticker component 48

Toggle Button component 48tools

Components Explorer 21Object Browser 18Properties panel 22

transferring global styles 107Transparency box 158trend icon 62troubleshooting

caching issues, Internet Explorer 82Excel 150fixed single value components 149frequently asked questions 149location of scenarios 149printing visualizations 150slow run time 150starting visualizations 151upgrading Microsoft Office 148URL button component 149URL-based images 151Use Web Service visualizations 150

truncation error 152

UUnicode font options 25unmanaged Crystal reports 133unmanaged environment 133updating data 36updating visualizations, with Flash variables 85URL link button 68

troubleshooting 149URL-based images 151Use Web Service Option 79

sample visualization 80setting with script 83visualizations, troubleshooting 150

Vvalue component 46

sample visualization 48variable length ranges, ignore end blanks 77

306 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide

Page 307: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Index

vertical line component 59visualizations

building 14creating 34examples 14previewing 29printing 150publishing 14taking snapshots 115updating data for 36updating with Flash variables 85

VLOOKUP 151

Wweb connectivity components 68

Appearance tab 275Behavior tab 273General tab 268

web service connector component 68sample visualization 69

Web Service Optionsample visualization 80setting with script 83

Weight box 158what-if-presentation 15Word, exporting visualizations to 113

XX Shift box 158XLF files

creating backups of 29importing from Xcelsius 3.0/3.5 12using international settings with 152

XML Data Button component 68, 87configuring 89load selection 94receive selection 90send data 94send selection 89

XML maps 39XML visualizations, debugging 98

XML, use web service option 79XY chart 42

YY Shift box 159

Crystal Xcelsius User Guide 307

Page 308: Xcelsius Designer Userguide En

Index

308 Crystal Xcelsius User Guide